Prins reaction and compounds useful in the synthesis of halichondrin macrolides and analogs thereof

Information

  • Patent Grant
  • 11542269
  • Patent Number
    11,542,269
  • Date Filed
    Thursday, January 3, 2019
    5 years ago
  • Date Issued
    Tuesday, January 3, 2023
    a year ago
Abstract
The invention provides methods utilizing Prins reaction in the preparation of compounds that may be useful as intermediates in the synthesis of halichondrin macrolides and analogs thereof. The invention also provides compounds that may be useful as intermediates in the synthesis of a halichondrin macrolides and methods for preparing the same.
Description
BACKGROUND

The invention relates to intermediates useful in the synthesis of pharmaceutically active macrolide compounds and methods of synthesizing macrolide compounds. Halichondrin B is a potent anticancer agent originally isolated from the marine sponge Halichondria okadai, and subsequently found in Axinella sp., Phakellia carteri, and Lissodendoryx sp. A total synthesis of halichondrin B was published in 1992 (Aicher, T. D. et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 114:3162-3164). Further synthetic and structure-activity relationship studies have been disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,338,865 and 5,436,238 and in Towle et al., Annual Meeting of the American Association for Cancer Research, Apr. 6-10, 2002, 5721 and Wang et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 10:1029-1032, 2000. Eribulin mesylate (also called Halaven®, E7389, and the mesylate salt of B1939), a nontaxane microtubule dynamics inhibitor, is a structurally simplified, synthetic analog of halichondrin B. Methods and intermediates for the synthesis of certain halichondrin B analogs and intermediates are described in International Publication Nos. WO 2005/118565, WO 2009/046308, WO 2009/064029, and WO 2009/124237, WO 2015/066729, and WO 2016/179607; U.S. Pat. No. 6,214,865; Austad et al., Synlett 24(3):333-337, 2013; Austad et al., Synlett. 24(3):327-332, 2013; and Chase et al., Synlett 24(3):323-326, 2013. New methods for the synthesis of halichondrin and its analogs (e.g., macrolide analogs) are desirable.


SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In general, the present invention provides methods and compounds useful for the preparation of macrocyclic intermediates in the synthesis of a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. In particular, the methods disclosed herein may be useful in the preparation of a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof through a synthesis including a C.23-C.24 bond-forming Prins reaction. Prins reaction precursors may be prepared using a Sakurai reaction, as described herein.


In one aspect, the invention provides a method of preparing a compound of formula (A):




embedded image




    • where
      • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image






      • where
        • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
        • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
          • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
          • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
          • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
          • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:









embedded image










          •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;





      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;

      • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

      • R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl,









embedded image






      • where
        • each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and
        • R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC, —CH═CH—COORC, —CH2CH2—SO2RD, or —CH═CH—SO2RD;

      • R6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

      • each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

      • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

      • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl.







The method includes producing the compound of formula (A) from a compound of formula (B), a compound of formula (C), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl. The compound of formula (B) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (A).


The compound of formula (C) is:

R4-R7,  (C)


where R7 is —CHO or




embedded image



and each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl.


In some embodiments, the producing the compound of formula (A) includes reacting the compound of formula (B), the compound of formula (C), R5OH, and a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)).


In certain embodiments, the method further includes producing the compound of formula (B) including reacting a compound of formula (D), a compound of formula (E), and a second Lewis acid.


The compound of formula (D) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (B).


The compound of formula (E) is:




embedded image


where RS is silyl, and R6 is as described for the compound of formula (B).


In some embodiments, the second Lewis acid is an oxophilic second Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof). In particular embodiments, the Lewis acid and the second Lewis acid are same. In further embodiments, the Lewis acid and the second Lewis acid are different.


In certain embodiments, the preparing the compound of formula (B) and the preparing the compound of formula (A) are performed as a single-pot transformation. In other embodiments, the method further includes epimerizing the product of reacting the compound of formula (D), the compound of formula (E), and the second Lewis acid.


In another aspect, the invention provides a method of preparing a compound of formula (B). The compound of formula (B) can be used as a reactant in the Prins reaction described herein. The method includes producing the compound of formula (B) from a compound of formula (D) and a compound of formula (E).


The compound of formula (B) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;

      • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

      • R6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl; and

      • Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

      • RC, when present, is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

      • RD, when present, is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl.







The compound of formula (D) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (B).


The compound of formula (E) is:




embedded image




    • where RS is silyl, and R6 is as described for the compound of formula (D).





In some embodiments, the producing the compound of formula (B) includes reacting the compound of formula (D), the compound of formula (E), and a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)).


In certain embodiments, the method further includes epimerizing the product of reacting the compound of formula (D), the compound of formula (E), and the Lewis acid.


In yet another aspect, the invention provides methods of preparing a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


In particular embodiments, the halichondrin macrolide or an analogue thereof is:




embedded image




    • a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof,





where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):




embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;





    • each of A1, A2, and A3 is independently H or OP″, where each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

    • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

    • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

    • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

    • k is 0 or 1; and

    • X1 is —CH2— or —O—.





In certain embodiments, the method includes

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (IA) from a compound of formula (IIC), a compound of formula (III), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;
    • and
    • (B) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (IA).


The compound of formula (IA) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;
      • R4 is







embedded image






      • where
        • each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC, —CH═CH—COORC, —CH2CH2—SO2RD, or —CH═CH—SO2RD;
        • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and
        • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;



    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.





The compound of formula (IIC) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IA).


The compound of formula (III) is:

R4-R7,  (III)

    • where R7 is —CHO or




embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl; and R4 is as described for the compound of formula (IA).





In particular embodiments, the method includes:

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (IVB) from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIA), a compound of formula (IVA), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;
    • (B) producing a compound of formula (IVC) from the compound of formula (IVB);
    • (C) producing a compound of formula (IVD) from the compound of formula (IVC);
    • and
    • (D) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (IVD).


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently-COORC or —SO2RD;
      • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
      • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;
      • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),
      • where
        • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
        • or
        • m is 0, and
        • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
        • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene;

    • and the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.





The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image




    • where RS is silyl.





The compound of formula (IIIA) is:

R4A-R7,  (IIIA)

    • where
      • R4A is




embedded image






      • where RC is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, and each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

      • R7 is —CHO or









embedded image






      • where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl.







The compound of formula (IVA) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • R9 is —CHO or —COOH;
      • (a1) R10 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
      • (a2) R10 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (a3) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;
      • (b1) A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
      • or
      • (b2) A1 is H or —OP″, and:
        • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
        • or
        • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″; and
      • (c1) R16 is H, and P8 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;
      • or
      • (c2) R16 and P8 combine to form a double bond;

    • and

    • each P″, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (IVB) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • X1 is —O—, —C(Y)2—, —CH(Y)—, or —CH2—;
      • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and
      • RG is







embedded image






      • where

      • R5 is an optionally substituted acyl; and

      • X2 is H or —CH2—X2A—CH2—CH═CH2, where X2A is —O—, —C(RH)2—, or —NRI—, where each RH is independently H or —COORJ, RI is an N-protecting group, and RJ is C1-6 alkyl; and



    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA) and the compound of formula (IVA).





The compound of formula (IVC) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L1 is







embedded image






      • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;



    • and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVB).





The compound of formula (IVD) is:




embedded image




    • where each of A1 and A2 is independently H or —OP″, and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVC).





In further embodiments, step (A) includes:

    • (E) producing a compound of formula (IA) from the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIIA), and R5OH, where the compound of formula (IA) is:




embedded image




    • where R4A is as described for the compound of formula (IIIA), and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IA) above;

    • and

    • (F) producing the compound of formula (IVB) from the compound of formula (IF) and the compound of formula (IVA).





In yet further embodiments, step (E) includes reacting the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIIA), R5OH, and a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)).


In still further embodiments, step (F) includes reacting R4A that is




embedded image



with a glycol cleaving agent, and a Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—COORC to produce R4A that is




embedded image


In other embodiments, step (F) includes reacting R4A that is




embedded image



with a 1,2-reducing agent and further reacting with an allyl halide or allyl pseudohalide.


In yet other embodiments, R9 is —CHO, X1 is —C(Y)2—, —CH(Y)—, or —CH2—, and step (A) includes reacting R9 with R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y) treated with a Brønsted base. In still other embodiments, X1 is —O—, and step (A) includes esterifying R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, with R9 that is —COOH.


In some embodiments, step (B) includes reacting the compound of formula (IVB) with an olefin metathesis catalyst.


In particular embodiments, P9 is H, R16 is H, and step (C) includes:

    • oxidizing the compound of formula (IVC) to produce a compound of formula (IVCa):




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVC);

    • and reacting the compound of formula (IVCa) with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce the compound of formula (IVD).





In certain embodiments, the compound of formula (IVB) is, or is converted to, a compound of formula (IVBa) prior to producing the compound of formula (IVC), where the compound of formula (IVBa) is:




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVB).





In further embodiments, the producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof includes reacting the compound of formula (IVD) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


In yet further embodiments, the method includes:

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (VB) from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIB), a compound of formula (VA), and R5OH,
    • where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;
    • (B) producing a compound of formula (VC) from the compound of formula (VB),
    • and
    • (C) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VC).


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;
      • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
      • RD, when present, is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;
      • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),
      • where
        • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
        • or
        • m is 0, and
        • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
        • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene;

    • and the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.





The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image




    • where RS is silyl.





The compound of formula (IIIB) is:

R4B-R7,  (IIIB)

    • where
      • R4B is but-3-en-1-yl,




embedded image








        • where each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • and

      • R7 is —CHO or









embedded image






      • where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl.







The compound of formula (VA) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • a designates (R)-stereogenic center, and Z is a sulfonate, chloride, bromide, or iodide; or a designates (S)-stereogenic center, and Z is OR16, where R16 is a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (a1) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
        • (a2) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;
        • or
        • (a3) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;
        • (b1) A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
        • or
        • (b2) A1 is H or —OP″, and:
          • (i) R13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
          •   or
          • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;
      • Y1 is iodide, bromide, or trifluoromethanesulfonate;
      • R9 is —CHO or —COOH;
      • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo; or both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal; and
      • each P″ is independently a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (VB) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl; and

    • RK is







embedded image




    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VA) and the compound of formula (IIA).





The compound of formula (VC) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • L1 is







embedded image








        • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;



      • b designates (S)-stereogenic center, if a designates (R)-stereogenic center; and

      • b designates (R)-stereogenic center, if a designates (S)-stereogenic center; and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VB).







In certain embodiments, step (A) includes:

    • (D) producing a compound of formula (ID) from the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIB), the compound of formula (IIIB), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl, and where the compound of formula (ID) is:




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA) the compound of formula (IIB), the compound of formula (IIIB), and R5OH;

    • and

    • (E) producing the compound of formula (VB) from the compound of formula (ID) and the compound of formula (VA).





In some embodiments, the producing the compound of formula (ID) includes reacting the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIIB), R5OH, and a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)).


In certain embodiments, step (D) includes a Sakurai reaction between the compound of formula (IIA) and the compound of formula (IIB) to produce a compound of formula (IIC), and a Prins reaction between the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIIB), and R5OH.


In further embodiments, the compound of formula (IIC) is:




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA).





In yet further embodiments, X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, or —C(Y)2—, and step (A) includes reacting R9, where R9 is —CHO, with R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y) treated with a Brønsted base, to produce —CO—X1—. In still further embodiments, X1 is —O—, and step (A) includes esterifying R9 that is —COOH with R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, to produce —CO—X1—.


In other embodiments, step (B) includes reacting the compound of formula (VB) with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt. In yet other embodiments, step (C) includes a step of nucleophilic ring-closing of the compound of formula (VC). In still other embodiments, both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal. In some embodiments, R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H. In certain embodiments, R4B is but-3-en-1-yl, and step (A) includes reacting the but-3-en-1-yl group with a dihydroxylating agent to produce R4B that is




embedded image



and cleaving the




embedded image



through a reaction with a glycol cleaving agent.


In particular embodiments, R4B is




embedded image



and step (A) includes reacting the




embedded image



with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol into a carbonyl group.


In further embodiments, R4B is




embedded image



and step (A) includes cleaving the




embedded image



through a reaction with a glycol cleaving agent.


In yet further embodiments, the method includes:

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (IF) from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;
    • (B) producing a compound of formula (IG) from the compound of formula (IF), and
    • (C) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (IG) and one or more intermediates.


The compound of formula (IF) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently-COORC or —SO2RD;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;

    • R4C is







embedded image




    •  where RC is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, and each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.





The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;
      • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
      • RD, when present, is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;
      • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+M)(ORF)(2−m),
      • where
        • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
        • or
        • m is 0, and
        • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
        • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IF).





The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image




    • where RS is silyl.





The compound of formula (IIIC) is:

R4C-R7,  (IIIC)

    • where R7 is —CHO or




embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl, and R4C is as described for the compound of formula (IF).





The compound of formula (IG) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • RE1 is







embedded image




    •  and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IF).





In some embodiments, step (B) includes reacting R4C that is




embedded image



with a glycol cleaving agent to produce an aldehyde, reacting the aldehyde with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—COORC to produce R4C that is




embedded image


In certain embodiments, step (B) includes reducing R4C that is




embedded image



with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce R4C that is




embedded image


In further embodiments, step (B) includes reducing R4C that is




embedded image



with an allylic reducing agent to produce R4C that is




embedded image


In-yet-further embodiments, step (B) includes reducing R4C that is




embedded image



with a 1,2-reducing agent to produce a carbonyl group in RE1.


In still further embodiments, the step reducing R4C that is




embedded image



includes an esterification reaction producing R4C that is




embedded image


In particular embodiments, step (B) includes reacting R4C that is




embedded image



with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group in RE1.


In certain embodiments, the one or more intermediates is a compound of formula (VIA):




embedded image




    • where

    • R10A is —CH2—CH═CH2, —(CH2)2—CH═CH2, or —(CH2)3—OP10;

    • each R10, R13, P9 and P10 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • A1 is H or —OP″; and

    • Y1 is chloro, bromo, iodo, trifluoromethanesulfonate, or trialkylsilane;





and step (C) includes:

    • (D) producing a compound of formula (VIB) from the compound of formula (IG) and the compound of formula (VIA).


The compound of formula (VIB) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L4 is







embedded image




    • R1 is —OP6 or —CH(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and Y is —COORC or —CHO;
      • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
      • or
      • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
        • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
        • or
        • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIA) and the compound of formula (IG).





In yet further embodiments, step (D) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIA) and the compound of formula (IG) with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt.


In still further embodiments, R10A is —CH2—CH═CH2, and step (C) includes:

    • (E) producing a compound of formula (VIC) from the compound of formula (VIB) and R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH or a metallic or metalloid moiety;
    • (F) producing a compound of formula (VID) from the compound of formula (VIC); and
    • (G) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VID).


The compound of formula (VIC) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L5 is







embedded image




    • X1 is —CH2— or —O—;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIB).





The compound of formula (VID) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L1 is







embedded image




    •  where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIC).





In some embodiments, R1 is —CH2(Y), X1 is —CH2—, X4 is oxo or —(CH(OP12))—, and step (E) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIB) with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is a metallic or metalloid moiety. In other embodiments, R1 is —OP6, P6 is H, X1 is —O—, X4 is oxo, and step (E) includes esterifying the compound of formula (VIB) with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH. In yet other embodiments, the producing step (F) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIC) with an olefin metathesis catalyst. In still other embodiments, step (G) includes reacting the compound of formula (VID) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


In certain embodiments, R10A is —CH2—CH2—CH═CH2, R1 is —OP6 or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and Y is —COORC, and step (C) includes:

    • (H) producing a compound of formula (VIE) from the compound of formula (VIB) and R17—CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH or a metallic or metalloid moiety;
    • (I) producing a compound of formula (VIF) from the compound of formula (VIE);
    • and
    • (J) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VIF).


The compound of formula (VIE) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L6 is







embedded image




    • X1 is —CH2— or —O—; and

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIB).





The compound of formula (VIF) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L1 is







embedded image




    •  where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIE).





In some embodiments, step (1) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIE) with an olefin metathesis catalyst. In particular embodiments, step (J) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIF) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


In certain embodiments, R10A is —(CH2)3—OP10, and step (C) includes:

    • (K) producing a compound of formula (VIG) from the compound of formula (VIB) and (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—RP, where each RC is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, and RP is H or —COOH;
    • (L) producing a compound of formula (VIF) from the compound of formula (VIG);
    • and
    • (M) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VIF).


The compound of formula (VIG) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L7 is







embedded image




    • X1 is —CH2— or —O—; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIB) and for (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—RP.





The compound of formula (VIF) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L1 is







embedded image




    •  where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond; and

    • X4 is oxo; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIG).





In further embodiments, the producing step (K) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIB) with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—RP under Claisen reaction conditions, where RP is H and R1 is —CH2(Y). In yet further embodiments, the producing step (K) includes esterifying the compound of formula (VIB) with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—R, where RP is —COOH and R1 is —OP6, where P6 is H. In still further embodiments, step (M) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIF) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


In some embodiments, step (C) includes:

    • (N) producing a compound of formula (VIIB) from the compound of formula (IG) and a compound of formula (VIIA);
    • (O) producing a compound of formula (VIIC) from the compound of formula (VIIB);
    • and
    • (P) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VIIC).


The compound of formula (VIIA) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;

    • or

    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • R9 is —CH2—OP″ or —COOP″;

    • R13 and each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • A1 is H or —OP″;

    • each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • Y1 is chloro, bromo, iodo, trifluoromethanesulfonate, or trialkylsilane.





The compound of formula (VIIB) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L4 is







embedded image




    • R1 is —OP6, —CH2(Y), or —CH(Y)2, where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and Y is —COORC or —CHO;
      • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
      • or
      • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
        • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
        • or
        • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;

    • R9 is —CHO or —COOP″;

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IG) and the compound of formula (VIIA).





The compound of formula (VIIC) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L1 is







embedded image






      • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;



    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIIB).





In certain embodiments, step (N) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIIA) and the compound of formula (IH) with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt. In particular embodiments, step (O) includes an esterification reaction between R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, and R9 that is —COOH. In further embodiments, step (O) includes a reaction between R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y), and R9 that is —CHO. In yet further embodiments, step (P) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIIC) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


In still further embodiments, the method includes:

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (VIID) from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIC), a compound of formula (VIIA), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;
    • (B) producing a compound of formula (VIIE) from the compound of formula (VIID);
    • and
    • (C) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VIIC).


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently-COORC or —SO2RD;
      • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
      • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;
      • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),
      • where
        • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
        • or
        • m is 0, and
        • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
        • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.





The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image




    • where RS is silyl.





The compound of formula (IIIC) is:

R4C-R7,  (IIIC)

    • where
    • R7 is —CHO or




embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl;

    • R4C is







embedded image






      • where each P7, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.







The compound of formula (VIIA) is:




embedded image



where

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;
    • or
    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;
    • R9 is —CHO or —COOH;
    • R13 and each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;
    • A1 is H or —OP″, where P″ is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and
    • Y1 is chloro, bromo, iodo, trifluoromethanesulfonate, or trialkylsilane.


The compound of formula (VIID) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • RL is







embedded image






      • where

      • R18 is —CHO or —CH2OP7;

      • R5 is optionally substituted acyl; and



    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA).





The compound of formula (VIIE) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L1 is







embedded image






      • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;



    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIID).





In some embodiments, step (A) includes:

    • (D) producing a compound of formula (IIC) from the compound of formula (IIA) and the compound of formula (IIB);
    • (E) producing a compound of formula (IF) from the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH;
    • and
    • (F) producing the compound of formula (VIIB) from the compound of formula (VIIA) and the compound of formula (IF).


The compound of formula (IIC) is:




embedded image




    • where the variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA).





The compound of formula (IF) is:




embedded image




    • where the variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH.





In certain embodiments, the producing the compound of formula (IF) includes reacting the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIIC), R5OH, and a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)).


In particular embodiments, step (F) includes:

    • (G) producing a compound of formula (IH) from the compound of formula (IF); and
    • (H) producing the compound of formula (VIID) from the compound of formula (IH) and the compound of formula (VIIA).


The compound of formula (IH) is:




embedded image




    • where the variables are as described for the compound of formula (IF).





In some embodiments, the producing step (G) includes reacting the compound of formula (IF) with an allylic reducing agent.


In certain embodiments, step (A) includes reducing R4C that is




embedded image



with a 1,2-reducing agent.


In particular embodiments, step (A) includes reducing R4C that is




embedded image



with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce a reduction product, and reducing the reduction product with a 1,2-reducing agent.


In further embodiments, step (A) includes reducing R4C that is




embedded image



with an allylic reducing agent to produce an acid product, and reducing the acid product with a 1,2-reducing agent capable of converting the carboxylic acid to an aldehyde.


In yet further embodiments, step (A) includes cleaving R4C that is




embedded image



with a glycol cleaving agent to produce an aldehyde, reacting the aldehyde (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—COORC to produce an enoate, reacting the enoate with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce R4C that is




embedded image



and reacting R4C that is




embedded image



with a 1,2-reducing agent capable of converting the carboxylic acid to an aldehyde.


In still further embodiments, step (A) includes an esterification reaction between R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, and Re that is —COOH. In other embodiments, step (A) includes a reaction between R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y), and R9 that is —CHO. In yet other embodiments, step (B) includes reacting the compound of formulas (VIID) with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt. In still other embodiments, step (C) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIIE) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


In some embodiments, the method includes:

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (VIIIB) from a compound of formula (VIIIA), a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), and a compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;
    • (B) producing a compound of formula (VIIIC) from the compound of formula (VIIIB);
    • and
    • (C) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VIIIC).


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently-COORC or —SO2RD;
      • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
      • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;
      • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),
      • where
        • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
        • or
        • m is 0
        • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
        • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.





The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image




    • where RS is silyl.





The compound of formula (IIIC) is:

R4C-R7,  (IIIC)

    • where
    • R4C is




embedded image






      • where

      • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

      • each P7, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



    • R7 is —CHO or







embedded image




    •  where each RA is independently an optionally substituted alkyl.





The compound of formula (VIIIA) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R4 and R5 combine to form a double bond;

    • or

    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • R9 is —CHO or —COOH;

    • and

    • each P9 and R13 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (VIIIB) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • RM is







embedded image






      • where

      • R5 is optionally substituted acyl; and

      • X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where



    • P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • the remaining groups are as described for the compound of formula (IIA) and the compound of formula (VIIIA).





The compound of formula (VIIIC) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • L1 is







embedded image






      • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;



    • A1 is H or —OP″, where P″ is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIIIB).





In certain embodiments, step (A) includes:

    • (D) producing a compound of formula (IIC) from the compound of formula (IIA) and the compound of formula (IIB);
    • (E) producing a compound of formula (IF) from the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH;
    • (F) producing a compound of formula (IJ) from the compound of formula (IF);
    • and
    • (G) producing the compound of formula (VIIIB) from the compound of formula (VIIIA) and the compound of formula (IJ).


The compound of formula (IIC) is:




embedded image




    • where the variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA).





The compound of formula (IF) is:




embedded image




    • where the variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH.





The compound of formula (IJ) is:




embedded image




    • where the variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIIIB).





In particular embodiments, step (D) includes reacting the compound of formula (IIB), the compound of formula (IIA), and a Lewis acid (e.g., the Lewis acid is an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)). In further embodiments, step (E) includes reacting the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIIC), R5OH and a Lewis acid (e.g., the Lewis acid is an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)). In yet further embodiments, the Lewis acid in step (D) and the Lewis acid in step (E) are different. In still further embodiments, the Lewis acid in step (D) and the Lewis acid in step (E) are same.


In some embodiments, step (F) includes converting




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


In particular embodiments, step (A) includes reacting R4C that is




embedded image



with a 1,2-reducing agent to produce a product, and reacting the product with a vinyl nucleophile.


In certain embodiments, step (A) includes reacting R4C that is




embedded image



with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce a product, reducing the product with a 1,2-reducing agent to produce a reduced product, and reacting the reduced product with a vinyl nucleophile.


In further embodiments, step (A) includes reacting R4C that is




embedded image



with an allylic reducing agent to produce an acid, reducing the acid with a 1,2-reducing agent to produce a reduced product, and reacting the reduced product with a vinyl nucleophile.


In yet further embodiments, step (A) includes cleaving R4C that is




embedded image



with a glycol cleaving agent to produce an aldehyde, reacting the aldehyde with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—COORC to produce an enoate, reacting the enoate with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce a product, reducing the product with a 1,2-reducing agent to product a reduced product, and reacting the reduced product with a vinyl nucleophile.


In still further embodiments, step (A) includes an esterification reaction between R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, and R9 that is —COOH.


In other embodiments, step (A) includes a reaction between R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y), and R9, where R9 is —CHO. In yet other embodiments, step (B) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIIIB) with an olefin metathesis catalyst. In still other embodiments, step (C) includes reacting the compound of formula (VIIIC) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


In some embodiments, the method includes:

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (IXB) from a compound of formula (IXA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIIE), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl; and
    • (B) producing the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (IXB).


The compound of formula (IXA) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • R9 is —CHO or —COOP″;

    • (a1) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (a2) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;

    • or

    • (a3) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;
      • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
      • or
      • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
        • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
        • or
        • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP;

    • RO is —CHO, —CH2OP″, —CH═CH2, —CH(OP″)CH2OP″, —C(O)—CH2P(O)(ORC)2, or halogen;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

    • each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image




    • where
      • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently-COORC or —SO2RD;
      • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;
      • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),
      • where
      • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
      • or
      • m is 0, and
        • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
        • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.





The compound of formula (IIIE) is:

R4E-R7,  (IIIE)

    • where
    • R4E is




embedded image






      • where
        • each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and
        • R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC, —CH═CH—COORC, —CH2CH2—SO2RD, or —CH═CH—SO2RD;

      • and



    • R7 is —CHO or







embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl.





The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image




    • where RS is silyl.





The compound of formula (IXB) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—;

    • L1 is







embedded image




    •  where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;

    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl;
      • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
      • or
      • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
        • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond;
        • or
        • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;
      • each P9 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo, or X3, together with the atom to which it is attached, combines to form —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;
      • or
      • both P9 and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal;

    • R19A is H, —OP″, or Y, and R19B is H; or R19A and R19B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IXA) and the compound of formula (IIA).





In some embodiments, step (A) includes reacting RE that is —CHO with the compound of formula (IIB) and a first Lewis acid to produce a group of the structure




embedded image


In certain embodiments, step (A) includes reacting the group of the structure




embedded image



with R7, R5OH, and a second Lewis acid to produce a group of the structure




embedded image


In particular embodiments, the first Lewis acid and/or second Lewis acid is an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof). In further embodiments, the first Lewis acid is same as the second Lewis acid. In still further embodiments, the first Lewis acid is same as the second Lewis acid.


In other embodiments, step (A) includes converting R4E that is




embedded image



to a group of the structure




embedded image



and reacting this group with RO that is —C(O)—CH2P(O)(ORC)2 under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions.


In yet other embodiments, step (A) includes reacting R4E that is




embedded image



with RO that is —CHO under Claisen reaction conditions, where R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC or —CH2CH2—SO2RD.


In still other embodiments, step (A) includes converting R4E that is




embedded image



to a group of the structure




embedded image



and reacting this group with RO that is a halogen under Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions, where R8, when present, is —CH2CH2—COORC or —CH═CH—COORC, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond.


In some embodiments, step (A) includes reacting R1 that is —OP6 and R9 under esterification reaction conditions to produce a group of the structure —X1—C(O)—, where P6 is H, R9 is —COOH, and X1 is —O—. In certain embodiments, step (A) includes reacting R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y) with R9 under Claisen reaction conditions to produce a group of the structure —X1—C(O)—, where Re is —CHO, and X1 is —C(Y)2— or —CH(Y)—, respectively. In particular embodiments, step (B) includes reacting the compound of formula (IXB) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent. In further embodiments, D′ is OP1, where P1 is alkyl. In yet further embodiments, D is H. In still further embodiments, A is of the following structure:




embedded image


In other embodiments, k is 0. In yet other embodiments, R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4 or —(CH2)nOP5, where n is 0. In still other embodiments, D′ is H. In some embodiments, A and D combine to form the following structure:




embedded image




    • where, the bond to oxygen atom originates at the carbon atom, to which D is attached in formula (IA), and

    • where R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4 or —(CH2)nOP5, where n is 2.





In certain embodiments, k is 1, and E is optionally substituted alkyl. In particular embodiments, G is O.


In still another aspect, the invention provides a method of preparing an intermediate in the synthesis of a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


In some embodiments, the intermediate is:




embedded image




    • where R7 is —CHO or







embedded image




    •  and
      • each R7A is independently alkyl or a hydroxyl protecting group; or
      • both R7A combine to form an optionally substituted alkylene.





In certain embodiments, the method includes:

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (Z2) from a compound of formula (Z1) and




embedded image




    •  where each RO is independently optionally substituted alkyl, where the compound of formula (Z1) is:







embedded image




    • where

    • each R20A is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20A, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • each R20B is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • P12A is H;

    • P12B is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • and the compound of formula (Z2) is:







embedded image




    • (B) producing a compound of formula (Z3) from the compound of formula (Z2) and







embedded image




    •  where each R21 is independently optionally substituted alkyl, where the compound of formula (Z3) is:







embedded image




    • (C) producing a compound of formula (Z4) from the compound of formula (Z3), where the compound of formula (Z4) is:







embedded image




    • where X5 is a halogen;

    • (D) producing a compound of formula (Z5) from the compound of formula (Z4), where the compound of formula (Z5) is:







embedded image




    • where

    • R20A is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • each R20B is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • (E) producing a compound of formula (Z6) from the compound of formula (Z5) and R7AOH







embedded image




    • (F) producing a compound of formula (Z7) from the compound of formula (Z6) and







embedded image




    •  where each R22 is independently optionally substituted alkyl, and the compound of formula (Z7) is:







embedded image




    • and

    • (G) producing the compound of formula (Z) from the compound of formula (Z7).





In particular embodiments, step (E) includes reacting the compound of formula (Z5) with R7AOH and a Brønsted acid. In further embodiments, step (F) includes reacting the compound of formula (Z6) with a glycol cleaving agent to produce an aldehyde product, and reacting the aldehyde product with




embedded image



under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions. In yet further embodiments, step (G) includes reacting the compound of formula (Z6) with a 1,4-reducing agent.


In still further embodiments, the intermediate is:




embedded image




    • where

    • R7 is —CHO or







embedded image




    •  and
      • each R7A is independently alkyl or a hydroxyl protecting group; or
      • both R7A combine to form an optionally substituted alkylene;

    • R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC, —CH═CH—COORC, —CH2CH2—SO2RD, or —CH═CH—SO2RD;

    • RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

    • RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl.





In other embodiments, the method includes:

    • (A) producing a compound of formula (Z2) from a compound of formula (Z1) and




embedded image




    •  where each RO is independently optionally substituted alkyl, where the compound of formula (Z1) is:







embedded image




    • where

    • each R20A is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20A, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • each R20B is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • P12A is H;

    • P12B is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • and the compound of formula (Z2) is:







embedded image




    • (B) producing a compound of formula (Z3) from the compound of formula (Z2) and







embedded image




    •  where each R21 is independently optionally substituted alkyl, where the compound of formula (Z3) is:







embedded image




    • (C) producing a compound of formula (Z4) from the compound of formula (Z3), where the compound of formula (Z4) is:







embedded image




    • where X5 is a halogen;

    • (D) producing a compound of formula (Z5) from the compound of formula (Z4), where the compound of formula (Z5) is:







embedded image




    • where

    • R20A is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • each R20B is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • (E) producing a compound of formula (Z5A) from the compound of formula (Z5) and R7AOH, where the compound of formula (Z5A) is:







embedded image




    • where

    • R20A is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • each R20B is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • (F) producing a compound of formula (Z5B) from the compound of formula (Z5A), where the compound of formula (Z5B) is:







embedded image




    • where R23 is H or —OR20A;

    • and

    • (G) producing the compound of formula (Z8) from the compound of formula (Z5B) and







embedded image




    •  in which each R22 is independently optionally substituted alkyl.





In further embodiments, step (E) includes reacting the compound of formula (Z5) with R7AOH and a Brønsted acid. In yet further embodiments, step (F) includes reacting the compound of formula (Z5A), in which both R20B are H, with a glycol cleaving agent. In still further embodiments, step (E) or step (F) further includes reacting —OR20A, where R20A is optionally substituted acyl with an allylic reducing agent. In other embodiments, step (G) includes reacting the compound of formula (Z5B) with




embedded image



under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (Z8), in which R8 is —CH═CH—COORC or —CH═CH—SO2RD, respectively. In yet other embodiments, step (G) further includes reacting the compound of formula (Z8), in which R8 is —CH═CH—COORC or —CH═CH—SO2RD, with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce the compound of formula (Z8), in which R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC or —CH2CH2—SO2RD, respectively. In still other embodiments, the producing the compound of formula (Z2) includes reacting the compound of formula (Z1) with




embedded image



under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions. In some embodiments, step (B) includes reacting the compound of formula (Z2) with a 1,2-reducing agent to produce a reduction product, and reacting the reduction product with




embedded image



under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions. In certain embodiments, step (C) includes substituting free hydroxyl group in the compound of formula (Z3) with a halogen. In particular embodiments, step (D) includes subjecting the compound of formula (Z4) to reductive metal conditions.


In a further aspect, the invention provides the compounds of formula (II), (IID), (IIE), (IIF), (IIG), (IIH), (IIi), (IVAb), (VAb), (VIIAa), (VIAa), (VIIID), (IXD), (IXF), (IXG), (Z), (Z1), (Z2), (Z3), (Z4), (Z5), (Z5A), (Z5B), or (Z6).


The compound of formula (II) is:




embedded image


where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):




embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OS2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • R6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl; and

    • Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • RC, when present, is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

    • RD, when present, is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl.





The compound of formula (VIIAa) is:




embedded image


where

    • R7 is —CH2OPA, —CHO, or




embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl;

    • R9 is —CH2—OP″, —CHO, or —COOP″;

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;

    • or

    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;

    • or

    • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;

    • each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P1 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal.





The compound of formula (VIAa) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • R7 is —CHO or







embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl;

    • R10A is —CH2—CH═CH2, —(CH2)2—CH═CH2, or —(CH2)3—OP10;

    • each of R10 and P10 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;

    • or

    • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;

    • and

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P1 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form ketal.





The A compound of formula (IID) or (IIF) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • X1 is —CH2— or —O—;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where Pa is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), where
      • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
      • or
      • m is 0, and
        • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
        • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene.





The compound of formula (IIE) or (IIG):




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • X1 is —CH2— or —O—; and

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (IIH) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • each RC is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • X1 is —CH2— or —O—;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), where
      • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
      • or
      • m is 0, and
      • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
      • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene.





The compound of formula (IIi) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • each RC is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

    • X1 is —CH— or —O—.





The compound of formula (VIIID) is:




embedded image


where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q or A is a group of formula (1):




embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OS2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • each P9 and R13 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;
      • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
      • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R4 and R5 combine to form a double bond; or
      • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • RM1 is







embedded image




    • where

    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl;

    • P13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • R4C is







embedded image




    • where RC is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and P7, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (IVAb) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;





each P6 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • (a1) R10 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
    • (a2) R10 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;
    • or
    • (a3) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;
    • (b1) A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
    • or
    • (b2) A1 is H or —OP″, and:
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″; and
    • (c1) R16 is H, and P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;
    • or
    • (c2) R16 and P3 combine to form a double bond;


and


each P″, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.


The compound of formula (VAb) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • a designates (R)-stereogenic center, and Z is a sulfonate, chloride, bromide, or iodide; or a designates (S)-stereogenic center, and Z is OR16, where R16 is a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • X1 is —CH—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo; or both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form ketal;

    • Y1 is iodide, bromide, or trifluoromethanesulfonate;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;

    • (a1) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (a2) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;

    • or

    • (a3) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • (b1) A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;

    • or

    • (b2) A1 is H or —OP″, and:
      • (i) R13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
        • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;

    • and

    • each P″ is independently a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (IXD) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P5 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • R7 is —CHO, —CH2OPA or







embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl;

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond; or

    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;

    • or

    • A1 is H or —OP″, and
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″; each P9 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group,

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo, or X3, together with the atom to which it is attached, combines to form —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P9 and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal; and

    • R19A is H, —OP″, or Y, and R19B is H; or R19A and R19B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond.





The compound of formula (IXF) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;

    • RO is —CHO, —CH2OP″, —CH═CH2, —CH(OP″)CH2OP″, —C(O)—CH2P(O)(ORC)2, or halogen;

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond; or

    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;

    • or

    • A1 is H or —OP″, and
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″; each P9 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • and

    • each of P″, P9, and P13 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (IXG) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • R7 is —CHO, —CH2OPA, or







embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl;

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond; or

    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;

    • or

    • A1 is H or —OP″, and
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″; each P9 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group,

    • each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo, or X3, together with the atom to which it is attached, combines to form —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P9 and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal; and

    • R19A is H, —OP″, or Y, and R19B is H; or R19A and R19B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond.





In a yet further aspect, the invention provides a compound of formula (Z), (Z1), (Z2), (Z3), (Z4), (Z5), (Z5A), (Z5B), or (Z6), as described herein.


In the halichondrin macrolide and halichondrin macrolide analog structures herein, when P1 is absent, each of D and D′ is independently H or optionally substituted alkyl, and, when P2 is absent, L is —C(O)—.


Definitions

Compounds useful in the invention may be isotopically labeled compounds. Useful isotopes include hydrogen, carbon, nitrogen, and oxygen (e.g., 2H, 3H, 13C, 14C, 15N, 18O, and 17O). Isotopically-labeled compounds can be prepared by synthesizing a compound using a readily available isotopically-labeled reagent in place of a non-isotopically-labeled reagent.


For any of the following chemical definitions, a number following an atomic symbol indicates that total number of atoms of that element that are present in a particular chemical moiety. As will be understood, other atoms, such as hydrogen atoms, or substituent groups, as described herein, may be present, as necessary, to satisfy the valences of the atoms. For example, an unsubstituted C2 alkyl group has the formula —CH2CH3. When used with the groups defined herein, a reference to the number of carbon atoms includes the divalent carbon in acetal and ketal groups but does not include the carbonyl carbon in acyl, ester, carbonate, or carbamate groups. A reference to the number of oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur atoms in a heteroaryl group only includes those atoms that form a part of a heterocyclic ring.


By “acetal” is meant —O—(CHR)—O—, where R is H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, or R group is a bond to an enumerated carbon atom, as shown in Chart 1, within the intermediate or within the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


By “acetyl” is meant an acyl, in which R is —CXnH3-n, where n is 0, 1, 2, or 3, and each X is independently alkoxy or halogen, provided that, when n is 3, each X is independently halogen, and, when n is 2, either both of the X groups are independently halogen or both of the X groups are independently alkoxy. An acetyl group may be substituted (i.e., n is 1, 2, or 3) or unsubstituted (i.e., n is 0).


By “acyl” is meant —C(O)R, where R is H, alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl. In exemplary acyl groups, R is H, C1-12 alkyl (e.g., C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C2-7, C3-12, or C3-6 alkyl), C2-12 alkenyl (e.g., C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, C3-12, or C3-6 alkenyl), C6-20 aryl (e.g., C6-14, C6-10, C8-20, or C8-14 aryl), monocyclic C1-6 heteroaryl (e.g., monocyclic C1-4 or C2-6 heteroaryl), C4-19 heteroaryl (e.g., C4-10 heteroaryl), (C6-14)aryl(C1-6)alkyl, (1-6)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl, or (C4-9)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl. As defined herein, any heteroaryl group present in an acyl group has from 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected independently from O, N, and S. An acyl group can be unsubstituted or substituted (e.g., optionally substituted acyl). In the optionally substituted acyl group, the substituent R is H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl. In some embodiments, acyl is C2-10 acyl.


By “acylating agent” is meant a compound that reacts with an amine or a hydroxyl group to produce an amide or an ester, respectively. An acylating agent has a formula R-LG, where R is acyl, and LG is halogen, carbonate, or —OR′, where R′ is acyl.


By “alkoxide” is meant an anionic compound RO, where R is alkyl. A counterion for alkoxide can be an alkali metal cation, an alkali earth metal cation, or a tetraalkylammonium cation. Alkoxide can be optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl.


By “alkoxy” is meant —OR, where R is alkyl. Alkoxy can be optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl.


By “alkoxyalkyl” is meant —OR, where R is alkyl substituted by alkoxy. Each portion of the alkoxyalkyl can be optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl.


By “alkoxyaryl” is meant —R′(R″)n, where n is 1 or 2, R′ is arylene and R″ is alkoxy, as defined herein. R′ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as aryl. R″ can be optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl.


By “alkoxyarylalkyl” is meant —R′(R″(R′″)n), where n is an integer from 1 to 3, R′ is alkylene, R″ is arylene, and R′″ is alkoxy, as defined herein. R′ can be optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl. R″ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as aryl. R′″ can be optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl.


By “alkyl” is meant a straight or branched chain saturated cyclic (i.e., cycloalkyl) or acyclic hydrocarbon group of from 1 to 12 carbons, unless otherwise specified. In some embodiments, alkyl is C1-6 alkyl. Exemplary alkyl groups include C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C2-7, C3-12, and C3-6 alkyl. Specific examples include methyl, ethyl, 1-propyl, 2-propyl, 2-methyl-1-propyl, 1-butyl, 2-butyl, and the like. Alkyl group can be optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, or 4 substituents selected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, amino, oxo, alkylthio, alkylenedithio, alkylamino, [alkenyl]alkylamino, [aryl]alkylamino, [arylalkyl]alkylamino, dialkylamino, silyl, sulfonyl, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, and azido.


By “alkylamino” is meant-NHR, where R is alkyl. By “[alkenyl]alkylamino” is meant-NRR′, where R is alkyl, and R′ is alkenyl. By “[aryl]alkylamino” is meant —NRR′, where R is alkyl, and R′ is aryl. By “[arylalkyl]alkylamino” is meant —NRR′, where R is alkyl, and R′ is arylalkyl. By “dialkylamino” is meant —NR2, where each R is alkyl, selected independently.


By “alkylaryl” is meant —R′(R″)n, where n is an integer from 1 to 3, R′ is arylene, and R″ is alkyl. Alkylaryl can be optionally substituted in the same manner as defined for each R′ and R″ group.


By “alkylene” is meant a multivalent alkyl group. Alkylene groups can be optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl groups. Alkylene may be a divalent alkylene. For example, a C1 alkylene group is —CH2—.


By “alkylenedithio” is meant —S-alkylene-S—. Alkylenedithio can be optionally substituted in the same manner as an alkylene group.


By “alkylhaloaryl” is meant —R′(R″)n—R′″, where n is an integer from 1 to 5 and R′ is arylene, R″ is halogen, and R′″ is alkylene, as defined herein. R′ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as aryl. R′″ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl.


By “alkylthio” is meant —SR, where R is alkyl. Alkylthio can be optionally substituted in the same manner as an alkyl group.


By “alkenyl” is meant a straight or branched chain cyclic or acyclic hydrocarbon group of, unless otherwise specified, from 2 to 12 carbons and containing one or more carbon-carbon double bonds. In some embodiments, alkenyl is C2-6 alkenyl. Exemplary alkenyl groups include C2-8, C2-7, C2-6, C2-4, C3-12, and C3-6 alkenyl. Specific examples include ethenyl (i.e., vinyl), 1-propenyl, 2-propenyl (i.e., allyl), 2-methyl-1-propenyl, 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl (i.e., crotyl), and the like. Alkenyl group can be optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl groups. Alkenyl groups, used in any context herein, may also be substituted with an aryl group.


By “amido” is meant —NHR, where R is acyl. Amido can be optionally substituted in the same manner as acyl.


By “aminal” is meant —O—CR2—NR′—, where each R is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, or both R groups are together optionally substituted alkylene, and R′ is H or an N-protecting group. In particular, R′ can be an N-protecting group (e.g., Boc).


By “amino” is meant —NR2, where N and R2 combine to form azido, or each R is independently H or an N-protecting group, or both R combine to form an N-protecting group. Amino can be unmasked, when each R is H, or masked, when at least one R is not H. Thus, optionally masked amino can be masked or unmasked amino.


By “aminoalkyl” is meant —R′(R″)n, where n is 1 or 2, R′ is alkylene, and R″ is amino, as defined herein. R′ can be optionally substituted in the same manner as an alkyl group.


By “aryl” is meant a monocyclic or multicyclic ring system having one or more aromatic rings, where the ring system is carbocyclic. Exemplary aryl groups include C6-20, C6-15, C6-10, C8-20, and C8-15 aryl. A preferred aryl group is a C6-10 aryl group. Specific examples of carbocyclic aryl groups include phenyl, indanyl, indenyl, naphthyl, phenanthryl, anthracyl, and fluorenyl. Aryl group can be optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, halogen, alkoxy, aryloxy, arylalkyloxy, alkylthio, alkylenedithio, alkylamino, [alkenyl]alkylamino, [aryl]alkylamino, [arylalkyl]alkylamino, dialkylamino, silyl, sulfonyl, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, and azido.


By “arylalkyl” is meant —R′R″, where R′ is alkylene, and R″ is aryl. Arylalkyl can be optionally substituted in the same manner as defined for each R′ and R″ group.


By “arylalkyloxy” is meant —OR, where R is arylalkyl. Arylalkyloxy can be optionally substituted in the same manner as defined for arylalkyl.


By “arylene” is meant a multivalent aryl group. Arylene groups can be optionally substituted in the same manner as aryl groups. For example, a C6 arylene group is phenylene.


By “aryloxy” is meant —OR, where R is aryl. Aryloxy can be optionally substituted in the same manner as aryl.


By “azido” is meant —N3.


By “boronate” is meant —OB(R)O—, where R is alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, alkoxy, or 2,6-diacetamidophenyl.


Boronate can be substituted, when R is a substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted aryl, substituted arylalkyl, or substituted alkoxy. Alternatively, boronate can be unsubstituted, when R is unsubstituted alkyl, unsubstituted alkenyl, aryl, unsubstituted arylalkyl, unsubstituted alkoxy, or 2,6-diacetamidophenyl.


By “carbamate” is meant a group, when a hydroxyl protecting group, having the formula —OC(O)NR2, or, when an amine protecting group, having the formula —NR′—C(O)OR, where each R and R′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl.


By “carbonate” is meant —OC(O)OR, where R is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl.


By “carbonyl” is meant —C(O)—.


By “carboxyl” is meant —C(O)OH, in free acid, ionized, or salt form.


By “carboxylic acid” is meant R—OH, where R is optionally substituted acyl.


By “carboxylic acid anhydride” is meant R—O—R, where each R is independently optionally substituted acyl.


By “cyclic carbonate” is meant —OC(O)O— that is part of a ring.


By “dicarbonyl” is meant —C(O)—C(O)—. Dicarbonyl-dioxo is —OC(O)—COO—.


By “ester” is meant —OC(O)R, where —C(O)R is an optionally substituted acyl group.


By “ether” is meant —OR, where R is alkyl, alkenyl, arylalkyl, silyl, or 2-tetrahydropyranyl. Ether can be optionally substituted as defined for each R group.


By “halichondrin macrolide” is meant a lactone including the structure of carbons 1-30 as shown in Chart 1, where carbons 29 and 30 form part of a five- or six-membered ring.


By “haloalkyl” is meant —R′(R″)n, where n is an integer from 1 to 5 and R′ is alkylene and R″ is halogen, as defined herein. R′ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl


By “haloaryl” is meant —R′(R″)n, where n is an integer from 1 to 5 and R′ is arylene and R″ is halogen, as defined herein. R′ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as aryl.


By “haloarylalkyl” is meant —R′(R″(R′″)n), where n is an integer from 1 to 5 and R″ is alkylene, R″ is arylene, and R′″ is halogen, as defined herein. R′ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl. R″ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as aryl.


By “halogen” is meant fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo.


By “heterocyclic radical” is meant a 5-, 6- or 7-membered ring, unless otherwise specified, containing one, two, three, or four heteroatoms independently selected from the group containing nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur. The 5-membered ring has zero to one double bonds, and the 6- and 7-membered rings have zero to two double bonds. Certain heterocyclyl groups include from 1 to 9 carbon atoms. Other such groups may include up to 12 carbon atoms. The term “heterocyclyl” also represents a heterocyclic compound having a bridged multicyclic structure in which one or more carbons and/or heteroatoms bridges two non-adjacent members of a monocyclic ring, e.g., a quinuclidinyl group. The term “heterocyclyl” includes bicyclic, tricyclic, and tetracyclic groups in which any of the above heterocyclic rings is fused to one, two, or three carbocyclic rings, e.g., an aryl ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclohexene ring, a cyclopentane ring, a cyclopentene ring, or another monocyclic heterocyclic ring, such as indolyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, tetrahydroquinolyl, benzofuryl, benzothienyl and the like. Examples of fused heterocyclyls include tropanes and 1,2,3,5,8,8a-hexahydroindolizine. Heterocyclics include pyrrolyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, imidazolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, pyridyl, piperidinyl, homopiperidinyl, pyrazinyl, piperazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, oxazolyl, oxazolidinyl, isoxazolyl, isoxazolidiniyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, thiazolyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolyl, isothiazolidinyl, indolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzoxazolyl, furyl, thienyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolyl, isoindazoyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, oxadiazolyl, purinyl, thiadiazolyl (e.g., 1,3,4-thiadiazole), tetrahydrofuranyl, dihydrofuranyl, tetrahydrothienyl, dihydrothienyl, dihydroindolyl, tetrahydroquinolyl, tetrahydroisoquinolyl, pyranyl, dihydropyranyl, dithiazolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl and the like. Still other exemplary heterocyclyls include: 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2-oxo-oxazolyl; 2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-1H-imidazolyl; 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-5-oxo-1H-pyrazolyl (e.g., 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2-phenyl-5-oxo-1H-pyrazolyl); 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2,4-dioxo-1H-imidazolyl (e.g., 2,3,4,5-tetrahydro-2,4-dioxo-5-methyl-5-phenyl-1H-imidazolyl); 2,3-dihydro-2-thioxo-1,3,4-oxadiazolyl (e.g., 2,3-dihydro-2-thioxo-5-phenyl-1,3,4-oxadiazolyl); 4,5-dihydro-5-oxo-1H-triazolyl (e.g., 4,5-dihydro-3-methyl-4-amino 5-oxo-1H-triazolyl); 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-2,4-dioxopyridinyl (e.g., 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-2,4-dioxo-3,3-diethylpyridinyl); 2,6-dioxo-piperidinyl (e.g., 2,6-dioxo-3-ethyl-3-phenylpiperidinyl); 1,6-dihydro-6-oxopyridiminyl; 1,6-dihydro-4-oxopyrimidinyl (e.g., 2-(methylthio)-1,6-dihydro-4-oxo-5-methylpyrimidin-1-yl); 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-2,4-dioxopyrimidinyl (e.g., 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-2,4-dioxo-3-ethylpyrimidinyl); 1,6-dihydro-6-oxo-pyridazinyl (e.g., 1,6-dihydro-6-oxo-3-ethylpyridazinyl); 1,6-dihydro-6-oxo-1,2,4-triazinyl (e.g., 1,6-dihydro-5-isopropyl-6-oxo-1,2,4-triazinyl); 2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-1H-indolyl (e.g., 3,3-dimethyl-2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-1H-indolyl and 2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-3,3′-spiropropane-1H-indol-1-yl); 1,3-dihydro-1-oxo-2H-iso-indolyl; 1,3-dihydro-1,3-dioxo-2H-iso-indolyl; 1H-benzopyrazolyl (e.g., 1-(ethoxycarbonyl)-1H-benzopyrazolyl); 2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-1H-benzimidazolyl (e.g., 3-ethyl-2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-1H-benzimidazolyl); 2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-benzoxazolyl (e.g., 5-chloro-2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-benzoxazolyl); 2,3-dihydro-2-oxo-benzoxazolyl; 2-oxo-2H-benzopyranyl; 1,4-benzodioxanyl; 1,3-benzodioxanyl; 2,3-dihydro-3-oxo,4H-1,3-benzothiazinyl; 3,4-dihydro-4-oxo-3H-quinazolinyl (e.g., 2-methyl-3,4-dihydro-4-oxo-3H-quinazolinyl); 1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-2,4-dioxo-3H-quinazolyl (e.g., 1-ethyl-1,2,3,4-tetrahydro-2,4-dioxo-3H-quinazolyl); 1,2,3,6-tetrahydro-2,6-dioxo-7H-purinyl (e.g., 1,2,3,6-tetrahydro-1,3-dimethyl-2,6-dioxo-7H-purinyl); 1,2,3,6-tetrahydro-2,6-dioxo-1H-purinyl (e.g., 1,2,3,6-tetrahydro-3,7-dimethyl-2,6-dioxo-1H-purinyl); 2-oxobenz[c,d]indolyl; 1,1-dioxo-2H-naphth[1,8-c,d]isothiazolyl; and 1,8-naphthylenedicarboxamido. Heterocyclic groups also include groups of the formula




embedded image



where


F′ is selected from the group consisting of —CH2—, —CH2O— and —O—, and G′ is selected from the group consisting of —C(O)— and —(C(R′)(R″))v—, where each of R′ and R″ is, independently, selected from the group consisting of hydrogen or alkyl of one to four carbon atoms, and v is one to three and includes groups, such as 1,3-benzodioxolyl, 1,4-benzodioxanyl, and the like. Any of the heterocyclyl groups mentioned herein may be optionally substituted with one, two, three, four or five substituents independently selected from the group consisting of: (1) alkanoyl (e.g., formyl, acetyl, and the like); (2) alkyl (e.g., alkoxyalkylene, alkylsulfinylalkylene, aminoalkylene, azidoalkylene, acylalkylene, haloalkylene (e.g., perfluoroalkyl), hydroxyalkylene, nitroalkylene, or thioalkoxyalkylene); (3) alkenyl; (4) alkynyl; (5) alkoxy (e.g., perfluoroalkoxy); (6) alkylsulfinyl; (7) aryl; (8) amino; (9) aryl-alkylene; (10) azido; (11) cycloalkyl; (12) cycloalkyl-alkylene; (13) cycloalkenyl; (14) cycloalkenyl-alkylene; (15) halo; (16) heterocyclyl (e.g., heteroaryl); (17) (heterocyclyl)oxy; (18) (heterocyclyl)aza; (19) hydroxy; (20) oxo; (21) nitro; (22) sulfide; (23) thioalkoxy; (24) —(CH2)qCO2RA, where q is an integer from zero to four, and RA is selected from the group consisting of (a) alkyl, (b) aryl, (c) hydrogen, and (d) aryl-alkylene; (25) —(CH2)qCONRBRC, where q is an integer from zero to four and where RB and RC are independently selected from the group consisting of (a) hydrogen, (b) alkyl, (c) aryl, and (d) aryl-alkylene; (26) —(CH2)qSO2RD, where q is an integer from zero to four and where RD is selected from the group consisting of (a) alkyl, (b) aryl, and (c) aryl-alkylene; (27) —(CH2)qSO2NRERF, where q is an integer from zero to four and where each of RE and RF is, independently, selected from the group consisting of (a) hydrogen, (b) alkyl, (c) aryl, and (d) aryl-alkylene; (28) thiol; (29) aryloxy; (30) cycloalkoxy; (31) arylalkoxy; (31) heterocyclyl-alkylene (e.g., heteroaryl-alkylene); (32) silyl; (33) cyano; and (34) —S(O)RH where RH is selected from the group consisting of (a) hydrogen, (b) alkyl, (c) aryl, and (d) aryl-alkylene. In some embodiments, each of these groups can be further substituted as described herein. For example, the alkylene group of an aryl-C1-alkylene or a heterocyclyl-C1-alkylene can be further substituted with an oxo group to afford the respective aryloyl and (heterocyclyl)oyl substituent group. In addition, when a heterocyclyl group is present in a bioreversible group of the invention it may be substituted with an ester, thioester, or disulfide group that is bound to a conjugating moiety, a hydrophilic functional group, or an auxiliary moiety as defined herein.


By “heterocyclic radical alkyl,” as used herein, represents an alkyl group substituted with a heterocyclic radical. The heterocyclic radical and alkyl portions may be substituted as the individual groups as described herein.


By “hydroxyalkyl” is meant —R′(R″)n, where n 1 or 2, R′ is alkylene and R″ is hydroxyl, as defined herein. R′ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as alkyl.


By “hydroxyaryl” is meant —R′(R″)n, where n is 1 or 2, R′ is arylene and R″ is hydroxyl, as defined herein. R′ can be further optionally substituted in the same manner as aryl.


By “hydroxyl” is meant —OH.


By “hydroxyl protecting group” is meant any group capable of protecting the oxygen atom to which it is attached from reacting or bonding. Hydroxyl protecting groups are known in the art, e.g., as described in Wuts, Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Wiley-Interscience, 4th Edition, 2006. Exemplary protecting groups (with the oxygen atom to which they are attached) are independently selected from the group consisting of esters, carbonates, carbamates, sulfonates, and ethers. In exemplary ester hydroxyl protecting groups, R of the acyl group is C1-12 alkyl (e.g., C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C2-7, C3-12, and C3-6 alkyl), C2-12 alkenyl (e.g., C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, C3-12, and C3-6 alkenyl), carbocyclic C6-20 aryl (e.g., C6-15, C6-10, C8-20, and C8-15 aryl), monocyclic C1-6 heteroaryl (e.g., C1-4 and C2-6 heteroaryl), C4-19 heteroaryl (e.g., C4-10 heteroaryl), (C6-15)aryl(C1-6)alkyl, (C4-19)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl, or (C1-6)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl. Specific examples of acyl groups for use in esters include formyl, benzoylformyl, acetyl (e.g., unsubstituted or chloroacetyl, trifluoroacetyl, methoxyacetyl, triphenylmethoxyacetyl, and p-chlorophenoxyacetyl), 3-phenylpropionyl, 4-oxopentanoyl, 4,4-(ethylenedithio)pentanoyl, pivaloyl (Piv), vinylpivaloyl, crotonoyl, 4-methoxy-crotonoyl, naphthoyl (e.g., 1- or 2-naphthoyl), and benzoyl (e.g., unsubstituted or substituted, e.g., p-methoxybenzoyl, phthaloyl (including salts, such a triethylamine and potassium), p-bromobenzoyl, and 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl). As defined herein, any heteroaryl group present in an ester group has from 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected independently from O, N, and S. In exemplary carbonate hydroxyl protecting groups, R is C1-12 alkyl (e.g., C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C2-7, C3-12, and C3-6 alkyl), C2-12 alkenyl (e.g., C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, C3-12, and C3-6 alkenyl), carbocyclic C6-20 aryl (e.g., C6-15, C6-10, C8-20, and C8-15 aryl), monocyclic C1-6 heteroaryl (e.g., C1-4 and C2-6 heteroaryl), C4-19 heteroaryl (e.g., C4-10 heteroaryl), (C6-15)aryl(C1-6)alkyl, (C4-19)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl, or (C1-6)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl. Specific examples include methyl, 9-fluorenylmethyl, ethyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, 2-(trimethylsilyl)ethyl, 2-(phenylsulfonyl)ethyl, vinyl, allyl, t-butyl, p-nitrobenzyl, and benzyl carbonates. As defined herein, any heteroaryl group present in a carbonate group has from 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected independently from O, N, and S. In exemplary carbamate hydroxyl protecting groups, each R is independently H, C1-12 alkyl (e.g., C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C2-7, C3-12, and C3-6 alkyl), C2-12 alkenyl (e.g., C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, C3-12, and C3-6 alkenyl), carbocyclic C6-20 aryl (e.g., C6-15, C6-10, C8-20, and C8-15 aryl), monocyclic C1-6 heteroaryl (e.g., C1-4 and C2-6 heteroaryl), C4-19 heteroaryl (e.g., C4-10 heteroaryl), (C6-15)aryl(C1-6)alkyl, (C4-19)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl, or (C1-6)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl. Specific examples include N-phenyl and N-methyl-N-(o-nitrophenyl) carbamates. As defined herein, any heteroaryl group present in a carbamate group has from 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected independently from O, N, and S. Exemplary ether hydroxyl protecting groups include C1-12 alkyl (e.g., C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C2-7, C3-12, and C3-6 alkyl), C2-12 alkenyl (e.g., C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, C3-12, and C3-6 alkenyl), (C6-15)aryl(C1-6)alkyl, (C4-19)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylthio(C1-6)alkyl, (C6-10)aryl(C1-6)alkoxy(16)alkyl, and silyl (e.g., tri(C1-6 alkyl)silyl, tri(C6-10 aryl or C1-6 heteroaryl)silyl, di(C6-10 aryl or C1-6 heteroaryl)(C1-6 alkyl)silyl, and (C6-10 aryl or C1-6 heteroaryl)di(C1-6 alkyl)silyl). Specific examples of alkylethers include methyl and t-butyl, and an example of an alkenyl ether is allyl. Ether hydroxyl protecting groups can be used to protect a carboxyl group (e.g., with a C1-12 alkyl (e.g., C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C2-7, C3-12, and C3-6 alkyl), (C6-15)aryl(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkoxy(C1-6)alkyl, (C1-6)alkylthio(C1-6)alkyl, or (C6-10)aryl(C1-6)alkoxy(C1-6)alkyl). Examples of alkoxyalkyls and alkylthioalkyls that can be used as ether hydroxyl protecting groups include methoxymethyl, methylthiomethyl, (2-methoxyethoxy)methyl, and β-(trimethylsilyl)ethoxymethyl. Examples of arylalkyl groups that can be used as ether hydroxyl protecting groups include benzyl, p-methoxybenzyl (MPM), 3,4-dimethoxybenzyl, triphenylmethyl (trityl), o-nitrobenzyl, p-nitrobenzyl, p-halobenzyl, 2,6-dichlorobenzyl, p-cyanobenzyl, naphthylmethyl, and 2- and 4-picolyl ethers. Specific examples of silylethers include trimethylsilyl (TMS), triethylsilyl (TES), t-butyldimethylsilyl (TBS), t-butyldiphenylsilyl (TBDPS), triisopropylsilyl (TIPS), and triphenylsilyl (TPS) ethers. An example of an arylalkyloxyalkylether is benzyloxymethyl ether. As defined herein, any heteroaryl group present in an ether group has from 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected independently from O, N, and S. Vicinal or 1,3-diols may be protected with a diol protecting group (e.g., to produce a “cyclic protected diol”), such as acetal (e.g., containing C1-6 alkylene), ketal (e.g., containing C3-6 alkylene or C3-6 cycloalkyl), cyclic silylene, cyclic carbonate, and cyclic boronate. Examples of acetal and ketal groups include methylene-dioxo, ethylidene-dioxo, benzylidene-dioxo, isopropylidene-dioxo, cyclohexylidene-dioxo, and cyclopentylidene-dioxo. An example of a cyclic silylene is di-t-butylsilylene. Another diol protecting group is 1,1,3,3-tetraisopropylsiloxanediyl. Examples of cyclic boronates include methyl, ethyl, phenyl, and 2,6-diacetamidophenyl boronates. Protecting groups may be substituted as is known in the art; for example, aryl and arylalkyl groups, such as phenyl, benzyl, naphthyl, or pyridinyl, can be substituted with C1-6 alkyl, C1-6 alkoxy, nitro, cyano, carboxyl, or halogen. Alkyl groups, such as methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, n-propyl, t-butyl, n-butyl, and sec-butyl, and alkenyl groups, such as vinyl and allyl, can also be substituted with oxo, arylsulfonyl, halogen, and trialkylsilyl groups. Preferred protecting groups are TBS and Piv. Protecting groups that are orthogonal are removed under different conditions, as is known in the art.


By “imido” is meant —NR2, where each R is independently optionally substituted acyl.


By “ketal” is meant —CR2—O—, where each R is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, or both R groups are together optionally substituted alkylene, or each of the R groups is a bond to an enumerated carbon atom, as shown in Chart 1, within the intermediate or within the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


By “macrocyclic” is meant a compound containing at least one n-membered ring, where n is equal to or greater than 10.


By “non-enolizable” is meant a group that, either alone or in combination with a group to which it is attached, cannot form an enol through a deprotonation/reprotonation sequence. For example, a “non-enolizable alkyl” can be bonded to a sulfone group or to a carbonyl group through a quaternary carbon atom (i.e., the carbon atom that is not bonded to a hydrogen atom).


By “N-protecting group” is meant a group protecting a nitrogen atom in a molecule from participating in one or more undesirable reactions during chemical synthesis (e.g., oxidation reactions, or certain nucleophilic and electrophilic substitutions). Commonly used N-protecting groups are disclosed in Wuts, Greene's Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, Wiley-Interscience, 4th Edition, 2006. Exemplary N-protecting groups include acyl (e.g., formyl, acetyl, trifluoroacetyl, propionyl, pivaloyl, t-butylacetyl, 2-chloroacetyl, 2-bromoacetyl, trifluoroacetyl, trichloroacetyl, phthalyl, o-nitrophenoxyacetyl, α-chlorobutyryl, benzoyl, 4-chlorobenzoyl, and 4-bromobenzoyl); sulfonyl-containing groups (e.g., benzenesulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl, o-nitrobenzenesulfonyl, and p-nitrobenzenesulfonyl); carbamate forming groups (e.g., benzyloxycarbonyl, p-chlorobenzyloxycarbonyl, p-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, p-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl, 2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl, p-bromobenzyloxycarbonyl, 3,4-dimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 3,5-dimethoxybenzyl oxycarbonyl, 2,4-dimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 4-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 2-nitro-4,5-dimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 3,4,5-trimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 1-(p-biphenylyl)-1-methylethoxycarbonyl, α,α-dimethyl-3,5-dimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, benzhydryloxy carbonyl, t-butyloxycarbonyl, diisopropylmethoxycarbonyl, isopropyloxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, methoxycarbonyl, allyloxycarbonyl, 2,2,2,-trichloroethoxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl, 4-nitrophenoxy carbonyl, fluorenyl-9-methoxycarbonyl, cyclopentyloxycarbonyl, adamantyloxycarbonyl, cyclohexyloxycarbonyl, and phenylthiocarbonyl), arylalkyl (e.g., triphenylmethyl); silyl groups (e.g., trimethylsilyl); and imine-forming groups (e.g., diphenylmethylene). Preferred N-protecting groups are acetyl, benzoyl, phenylsulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl, p-nitrobenzenesulfonyl, o-nitrobenzenesulfonyl, t-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc), and benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz).


By “oxo” or (O) is meant ═O.


By “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” is meant a salt within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response and the like and commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are well known in the art. For example, pharmaceutically acceptable salts are described in: Berge et al., J. Pharmaceutical Sciences 66:1-19, 1977 and in Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection, and Use, (Eds. P. H. Stahl and C. G. Wermuth), Wiley-VCH, 2008. Representative acid addition salts include acetate, adipate, alginate, ascorbate, aspartate, benzenesulfonate, benzoate, bisulfate, borate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, citrate, cyclopentanepropionate, digluconate, dodecylsulfate, ethanesulfonate, fumarate, glucoheptonate, glycerophosphate, hemisulfate, heptonate, hexanoate, hydrobromide, hydrochloride, hydroiodide, 2-hydroxy-ethanesulfonate, lactobionate, lactate, laurate, lauryl sulfate, malate, maleate, malonate, methanesulfonate, 2-naphthalenesulfonate, nicotinate, nitrate, oleate, oxalate, palmitate, pamoate, pectinate, persulfate, 3-phenylpropionate, phosphate, picrate, pivalate, propionate, stearate, succinate, sulfate, tartrate, thiocyanate, toluenesulfonate, undecanoate, valerate salts and the like. A preferred salt is the mesylate salt.


By “pseudohalogen” is meant —O—SO2R, where R is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl. Non-limiting examples of pseudohalogens include trifluoromethanesulfonate and nonaflate.


By “silyl” is meant —SiR3, where each R is independently alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, or arylalkyl. Examples of silyl groups include tri(C1-6 alkyl)silyl, tri(C6-10 aryl or C1-6 heteroaryl)silyl, di(C6-10 aryl or C1-6 heteroaryl)(C1-6 alkyl)silyl, and (C6-10 aryl or C1-6 heteroaryl)di(C1-6 alkyl)silyl. It will be understood that, when a silyl group includes two or more alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or arylalkyl groups, these groups are independently selected. As defined herein, any heteroaryl group present in a silyl group has from 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected independently from 0, N, and S. Silyl can be optionally substituted in the same manner as defined for each R group.


By “silylene” is meant —SiR2—, where each R is independently alkyl, alkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, or alkoxy. By “dialkylsilylene” is meant a silylene, where each R is alkyl. Silylene can be optionally substituted in the same manner as defined for each R group. Silylene-dioxo is a group having the formula —O—SiR2—O—.


By “strong base” is meant a Brønsted base, the conjugate acid of which has pKa that is greater than or equal to 13. Non-limiting examples of strong bases include alkyl alkali metals (e.g., butyl lithium or Schlosser's base), Grignard reagents (e.g., alkyl magnesium halide), alkali or alkali earth alkoxides, alkali or alkali earth amides (e.g., diisopropylamide, tetramethylpiperidide, or bis(trimethylsilyl)amide), and phosphazene bases (e.g., Schwesinger base). Non-limiting examples of the alkali amides are lithium diisopropylamide, lithium tetramethylpiperidide, lithium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, sodium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, and potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide.


By “sulfonamide” is meant —NR, where R is sulfonyl.


By “sulfonate” is meant —OS(O)2R, where R is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl. In exemplary sulfonates, R is C1-12 alkyl (e.g., C1-8, C1-6, C1-4, C2-7, C3-12, or C3-6 alkyl), C2-12 alkenyl (e.g., C2-8, C2-6, C2-4, C3-12, or C3-6 alkenyl), carbocyclic C6-20 aryl (e.g., C6-15, C6-10, C8-20, or C8-15 aryl), monocyclic C1-6 heteroaryl (e.g., C1-4 and C2-6 heteroaryl), C4-19 heteroaryl (e.g., C4-10 heteroaryl), (C6-15)aryl(C1-6)alkyl, (C4-19)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl, or (C1-6)heteroaryl(C1-6)alkyl. As defined herein, any heteroaryl group present in a sulfonate group has from 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected independently from O, N, and S.


By “sulfonyl” is meant —S(O)2R, where R is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, optionally substituted arylalkyl, or silyl. Preferred R groups for sulfonyl are the same as those described above for sulfonates.


By “thioacetal” is meant —S—(CHR)—S—, where R is H, optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl.


By “thioketal” is meant —S—(CR2)—S—, where each R is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl.


By “triflate” is meant trifluoromethanesulfonate.


The pKa values recited herein refer to the pKa values of a conjugate Brønsted acid in water at room temperature, unless stated otherwise.


References to compounds described herein encompass their salts, where applicable.







DETAILED DESCRIPTION

The present invention provides compounds and methods that may be useful in the synthesis of halichondrin macrolides and analogs thereof (see Chart 1). Preferably, the halichondrin macrolide analog is eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate). Preferably, the halichondrin macrolide is a halichondrin B macrolide. The carbon-atom numbering schemes for a halichondrin macrolide and analog thereof are shown in Chart 1.




embedded image




    • in which each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and 1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image




    • where

    • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;

    • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
      • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
      • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
      • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP″, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
      • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image






      •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



    • each of A1, A2, and A3 is independently H or OP″, where each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

    • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

    • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

    • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2; and

    • k is 0 or 1.





In the halichondrin macrolide and halichondrin macrolide analog structures, when P1 is absent, each of D and D′ is independently H or optionally substituted alkyl, and, when P2 is absent, L is —C(O)—.


Prins Reaction


In one aspect, the invention provides a compound of formula (A) and methods of its preparation. The compound of formula (A) may be prepared from a compound of formula (B), a compound of formula (C), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl. For example, a compound of formula (B), a compound of formula (C), and R5OH may be subjected to Prins reaction conditions, e.g., as known in the art. For example, the compound of formula (B), the compound of formula (C), and R5OH may be reacted with a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or solvate thereof)).


The compound of formula (A) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):







embedded image






      • where

      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;

      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:









embedded image








        •  where each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;





    • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

    • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

    • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

    • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

    • k is 0 or 1;

    • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • R4 is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted alkenyl, optionally substituted alkynyl,







embedded image






      • where
        • each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and
        • R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC, —CH═CH—COORC, —CH2CH2—SO2RD, or —CH═CH—SO2RD;



    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl;

    • R6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl.





In the compound of formula (A), when P1 is absent, each of D and D′ is independently H or optionally substituted alkyl, and, when P2 is absent, L is —C(O)—.


The compound of formula (B) is:




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for formula (A).





The compound of formula (C) is:

R4-R7,  (C)

    • where
    • R7 is —CHO or




embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl, and

    • R4 is as described for the compound of formula (A).





The compound of formula (B) may be prepared from a compound of formula (D) and a compound of formula (E). For example, the compound of formula (D) and the compound of formula (E) may be subjected to Sakurai reaction conditions, e.g., as known in the art. In certain embodiments, the compound of formula (D) may be reacted with the compound of formula (E) and a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)) to produce the compound of formula (B).


The compound of formula (D) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • all variables are as described for the compound of formula (B).





The compound of formula (E) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • RS is silyl (e.g., Me3Si—); and

    • R6 is as described for the compound of formula (B).





The Sakurai reaction producing the compound of formula (B) introduces the secondary alcohol stereogenic center in the compound of formula (B). If the stereoselectivity of the Sakurai reaction is less than desirable, the Sakurai reaction product can be subjected to epimerization to enrich the product in the compound of formula (B) relative to its diastereomer. In a non-limiting example, the Sakurai reaction products (the compound of formula (B) and its C.27 diastereomer) can be reacted with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane) to give a compound of formula (F), and the compound (F) can then be subjected to enantioselective 1,2-reduction reaction conditions (e.g., Corey-Bakshi-Shibata reaction). Alternatively, if the diastereoselectivity of the Sakurai reaction favors the formation of the diastereomer of the compound of formula (B), the Mitsunobu reaction may be used to invert the secondary alcohol stereocenter in a diastereomeric Sakurai reaction product mixture.


The compound of formula (F) is:




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for formula (B).





Enantioselective 1,2-reduction reaction conditions are known in the art. In a non-limiting example, the enantioselective 1,2-reduction reaction is Corey-Bakshi-Shibata reaction. Corey-Bakshi-Shibata reduction can include reacting a ketone with CBS catalyst and borane or a solvate thereof. In a non-limiting example, (S)-CBS-oxazaborolidine catalyst can be used with borane or a solvate thereof (e.g., BH3.THF) to control the stereochemistry of the resulting secondary alcohol in the preparation of the compound of formula (II) from the compound of formula (F).


Mitsunobu reaction conditions are known in the art. In a non-limiting example, the diastereomeric Sakurai reaction product mixture may be reacted with an azadicarboxylate compound (e.g., DIAD), phosphine (e.g., PPh3), and a carboxylic acid (e.g., 3,5-dinitrobenzoic acid) to produce a compound of formula (G):




embedded image




    • where

    • RAc is optionally substituted acyl; and

    • the remaining variables are as described for formula (B).





The compound of formula (G) may be converted to the compound of formula (B). In a non-limiting example, the compound of formula (G) may be subjected to alcoholysis or hydrolysis reaction conditions (e.g., Mg(OMe)2 in MeOH) to produce the compound of formula (B). Alternatively, the compound of formula (G) may be reacted with a 1,2-reducing agent to produce the compound of formula (B).


In the compounds described herein, R6 may be optionally substituted alkyl (e.g., methyl).


In the compounds described herein, D may be H. In the compounds described herein, D′ may be OP1 (e.g., P1 may be alkyl (e.g., methyl)). In the compounds described herein, G may be 0.


In the compounds described herein, k may be 0, and R1 may be —CH2(Y), where Y may be —SO2RD where, RD is optionally substituted aryl (e.g., phenyl) or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl.


In the compounds described herein, E may be optionally substituted alkyl (e.g., methyl).


In the compounds described herein, D may be H, and A may be:




embedded image


In the compounds described herein, k may be 0, and R1 may be —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y). In the compounds described herein, R3 may be —(CH2)nNP3P4 or —(CH2)nOP5, where n may be 0.


In the compounds described herein, A and D may combine to form the following structure:




embedded image


where the bond to the oxygen atom originates at the carbon atom to which D is attached in formula (A) or formula (B). In the compounds described herein, R3 may be —(CH2)nNP3P4 or —(CH2)nOP5, and n is 2.


In the compounds described herein, k may be 1, and E may be optionally substituted alkyl (e.g., methyl). In the compounds described herein, R1 may be —CH2(Y), where Y may be —COORD, where RD may be optionally substituted alkyl (e.g., methyl).


Preparation of Halichondrin Macrolides and Analogs Thereof


A halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof may be prepared as described herein and using methods and reactions known in the art. Non-limiting examples of methods and reactions useful for the preparation of a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof include U.S. patent application publication Nos. 2016/0264594, 2015/0158881, 2011/0184190, 2011/0054194, 2009/0203771, and 2009/0198074; International patent application publication No. WO 2016/179607; U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,338,865, 5,436,238, 6,214,865, and 8,445,701; and in Towle et al., Annual Meeting of the American Association for Cancer Research, Apr. 6-10, 2002, 5721; Wang et al., Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 10:1029-1032, 2000; Aicher et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 114:3162-3164, 1992; Ueda et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 136:5171-5176; and Yamamoto et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 134:893-896, 2012.


As described herein, one of skill in the art can identify the sequence of reactions involving hydroxyl protecting group removing agents and Brønsted acids to convert the compounds described below into a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. One of skill in the art can recognize that certain functional groups require protecting groups known in the art to reduce or prevent undesired reactivity. One of skill in the art can select appropriate protecting groups to be used in the syntheses described herein.


Chart 2 illustrates the macrocycle disconnections that may be useful for the preparation of a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.




embedded image




    • where X1 is —O— or —CH2—, and the remaining variables are as described in Chart 1.





Table 1 lists the macrocyclic retrosynthesis disconnections shown in Chart 2 and indicates corresponding exemplary bond-forming reactions as described herein. Any of these various reactions can be employed in the synthesis of halichondrin macrolide or analogs thereof. For example, these reactions may be employed to couple various fragments together or to form the macrocycle.











TABLE 1





Discon-




nection
Exemplary Reaction
Reference(s)







C.1-X1
Esterification
U.S. Pat. No.



(e.g., of the compound of formula (VIIB))
5,338,865



Claisen reaction
U.S. Pat. No.



(e.g., of the compound of formula (VIIB))
6,214,865




US 2016/0264594


C.2-C.3
Olefin Metathesis
US 2016/0264594



(e.g., of the compound of formula (VIE))
WO 2016/179607



Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons




(e.g., of the compound of formula (VIG))



C.3-C.4
Olefin Metathesis
US 2016/0264594



(e.g., of the compound of formula (VIC))
WO 2016/179607


C.12-C.13
Olefin Metathesis
WO 2016/179607



(e.g., of the compound of formula (VIIIB))



C.13-C.14
Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi
US 2009/0203771



(e.g., of the compound of formula (VIID))



C.15-C.16
Olefin metathesis
US 2016/0264594



(e.g., of the compound of formula (IVB))
WO 2016/179607


C.19-C.20
Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi
US 2016/0264594



(e.g., of the compound of formula (VB))
WO 2016/179607


C.23-C.24
Prins reaction (e.g., producing the




compound of formula (IXB))









The methods of preparing a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof disclosed herein include a C.23-C.24 bond-forming Prins reaction either as a macrocylization step or as a step in the synthesis of non-macrocyclic intermediates. In some approaches, a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)) may be prepared from the compound of formula (IA) using methods and reaction conditions known in the art.


A compound of formula (IA) may be produced from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (III), and R5OH. The compound of formula (IA) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • R4 is







embedded image






      • where
        • each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC, —CH═CH—COORC, —CH2CH2—SO2RD, or —CH═CH—SO2RD;
        • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and
        • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl; and



    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl;

    • and the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)).





In the compound of formula (IA), when P1 is absent, each of D and D′ is independently H or optionally substituted alkyl.


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),
      • where
        • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
        • or
        • m is 0, and
        • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
        • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene;

    • and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IA).





The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image




    • where RS is silyl (e.g., Me3Si—).





The compound of formula (III) is:

R4-R7,  (III)

    • where
    • R7 is —CHO or




embedded image




    •  where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl, and R4 is as described for the compound of formula (IA).





Preparation of the compound of formula (IA) may include reacting the compound of formula (IIA) (in which RE is —CHO), the compound of formula (IIB), and a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)) to produce a compound of formula (IIC):




embedded image




    • where the variables are as described for the compound of formula (IA).





The compound of formula (III) and the compound of formula (IIC) may be reacted under Prins reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (IA). Prins reaction conditions are known in the art. In a non-limiting example, the compound of formula (III) and the compound of formula (IIC) may be reacted with a Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof)).


The following describes exemplary conditions for macrocyclization at the indicated positions. These reaction conditions may also be used to couple two or more fragments prior to macrocyclization.


C.1-X1 Bond-Forming Macrocyclization


A halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)) may be prepared through a C.0-C.1 or a O-C.1 bond-forming macrocyclization according to the following synthesis strategy from a compound of formula (VIIB):




embedded image


where

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H
    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;
    • or
    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;


L4 is




embedded image


R1 is —OP6, —CH2(Y), or —CH(Y)2, where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and Y is —COORC or —CHO;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted
    • aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and
    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
    • or
    • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
    • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
    • or
    • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;


R5 is optionally substituted acyl;


R9 is —CHO or —COOP″;


each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal;


and the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


The compound of formula (VIIB) is converted to a compound of formula (VIIC):




embedded image


where


L1 is




embedded image




    • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;





X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—;


X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIIB).


Preparation of the compound of formula (VIIC) may include an esterification reaction between R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, and R9 that is —COOH. Alternatively, preparation of the compound of formula (VIIC) may include a reaction between R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y), and R9 that is —CHO (e.g., under Claisen reaction conditions). Oxidation of the Claisen product (X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H) with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group may produce X4 that is oxo. Further desulfonylation or decarboxylation of this compound of formula (VIIC) may produce the compound of formula (VIIC), in which X1 is —CH2—.


The compound of formula (VIIC) is then converted to the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof using methods described herein and those known in the art, e.g., those described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,338,865, US 2016/0264594, US 2009/0203771, and WO 2016/179607. For example, preparation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof may include reacting the compound of formula (VIIC) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


The compound of formula (VIIB) may be prepared from a compound of formula (VIIA), the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH. The compound of formula (VIIA) is:




embedded image


where

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;
    • or
    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;


R9 is —CH2—OP″, —CHO, or —COOP″;


R13 and each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;


A1 is H or —OP″;


each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and


Y1 is chloro, bromo, iodo, trifluoromethanesulfonate, or trialkylsilane.


The compound of formula (IIIC) is:

R4C-R7,  (IIIC)


where


R7 is —CHO, —CH2OPA,


or




embedded image



where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl; and R4C is




embedded image




    • where

    • RC is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • PA is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • P7, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.





Preparation of the compound of formula (VIIB) can be accomplished as follows. The compound of formula (IIIC), in which R7 is —CH2OPA or




embedded image



may be converted to a compound of formula (IIID):

R4D-R7,  (IIID)


where


R4D is




embedded image



and


all remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (C).


The compound of formula (IIID) may be reacted with the compound of formula (VIIA) under Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions (e.g., with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt as described herein) to form a compound of formula (VIIAa):




embedded image


where


R7 is —CH2OPA, —CHO, or




embedded image


and all remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIIB) and the compound of formula (IIID).


The compound of formula (VIIAa), in which R7 is —CHO, may be reacted with a compound of formula (IIC) and R5OH under Prins reaction conditions to form the compound of formula (VIIB).


Alternatively, preparation of the compound of formula (VIIB) can be accomplished by reacting the compound of formula (IG) and the compound of formula (VIIA) under Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions (e.g., with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt as described herein).


The compound of formula (IG) is:




embedded image


where


RE1 is




embedded image




    • where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;





and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIIB).


The compound of formula (IG) may be formed from a compound of formula (IF):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IG) and the compound of formula (C).


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with a glycol cleaving agent to produce an aldehyde, which may then be reacted with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—COORC to produce R4C that is




embedded image


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce R4C that is




embedded image


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with an allylic reducing agent to produce R4C that is




embedded image



(e.g., producing this R4C may further include an esterification reaction after the reaction with an allylic reducing agent).


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with a 1,2-reducing agent to produce




embedded image


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group in




embedded image


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. For example,




embedded image



may be converted to




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


C.2-C.3 and C.3-C.4 Bond-Forming Macrocyclizations


In another approach, a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)) may be prepared through a C.2-C.3 or a C.3-C.4 bond-forming macrocyclization according to the following strategy.


In some embodiments, a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof is prepared from a compound of formula (VIB) is:




embedded image


where


L4 is




embedded image


R1 is —OP6 or —CH(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and Y is —COORC or —CHO;


R5 is optionally substituted acyl;


R10A is —CH2—CH═CH2, —(CH2)2—CH═CH2, or —(CH2)3—OP10;


each of R10 and P10 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
    • or
    • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;


each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal;


and


the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


The compound of formula (VIB) may be converted to the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)) using reaction conditions known in the art, e.g., as described herein.


In particular embodiments, preparation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VIB) through C.3-C.4 bond-forming macrocyclization includes producing a compound of formula (VIC) from the compound of formula (VIB). The compound of formula (VIC) is




embedded image


where


L5 is




embedded image


X1 is —CH2— or —O—;


X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and


the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIB).


The compound of formula (VIC) may be prepared by reacting the compound of formula (VIB) with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH or a metallic or metalloid moiety. The compound of formula (VIB), in which R1 is —CH2(Y), may be reacted with R17—CH2CH═CH2, in which R17 is a metallic or metalloid moiety, to produce the compound of formula (VIC), in which X1 is —CH2—, and X4 is oxo or —(CH(OP12))—. The compound of formula (VIB), in which R1 is —OP6, and P6 is H, may be esterified with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH, to produce the compound of formula (VIC), in which X1 is —O—, and X4 is oxo.


The compound of formula (VIC) is then converted to a compound of formula (VI):




embedded image


where


L1 is




embedded image



where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIC).


The compound of formula (VID) is produced through a reaction of the compound of formula (VIC) with an olefin metathesis catalyst.


The compound of formula (VID) may be converted to the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof using methods described herein and those known in the art, e.g., those described in US 2016/0264594, US 2009/0203771, and WO 2016/179607.


Preparation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof may include reacting the compound of formula (VID) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent. A reaction of the compound of formula (VID) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent may lead to the C.3-C.4 double bond isomerization to give an enoate/enone described herein upon exposure to basic (e.g., isomerization mediated by a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent, such as a fluoride source) or acidic (e.g., isomerization mediated by a Brønsted acid) conditions. The resulting enoate/enone may undergo a reaction with a hydroxyl of —OR10.


In certain embodiments, preparation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof from the compound of formula (VIB) through C.2-C.3 bond-forming macrocyclization includes producing a compound of formula (VIE) from the compound of formula (VIB). The compound of formula (VIE) is:




embedded image


where


L6 is




embedded image


X1 is —CH2— or —O—;


X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and


the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIB).


The compound of formula (VIB) may be converted to a compound of formula (VIE) through a reaction with R17—CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH or a metallic or metalloid moiety. For example, the compound of formula (VIB), in which R1 is —CH2(Y), can be reacted with R1—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is a metallic or metalloid moiety, to give the compound of formula (VIE), in which X1 is —CH2—, and X4 is oxo or —(CH(OP12))—. Alternatively, the compound of formula (VIB), in which R1 is —OP6, and P6 is H, can be esterified with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH, to give the compound of formula (VIE), in which X1 is —O—, and X4 is oxo.


The compound of formula (VIE) may be converted to a compound of formula (VIF):




embedded image


where


L1 is




embedded image



where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;


and the remaining variables are as described for the formula (VIE).


The compound of formula (VIF) may be produced by a reaction of the compound of formula (VIE) with an olefin metathesis catalyst.


Alternatively, the compound of formula (VIF), in which X4 is oxo, may be prepared from a compound of formula (VIG):




embedded image


where


L7 is




embedded image


X1 is —CH2— or —O—;


each RC is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIF).


The compound of formula (VIG) may be prepared by reacting the compound of formula (VIB) with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—RP, where each RC is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, and RP is H or —COOH. For example, the compound of formula (VIB), in which R1 is —CH2(Y), may be reacted with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—RP, in which RP is H, under Claisen reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (VIG). Alternatively, the compound of formula (VIB), in which R1 is —OP6, where P6 is H, may be esterified with (RC)2P(O)—CH2—RP, in which RP is —COOH, to produce the compound of formula (VIG).


The compound of formula (VIG) is then converted to the compound of formula (VIF), e.g., through a Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction, where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIG).


The compound of formula (VIF) is then converted to the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof using methods described herein and those known in the art, e.g., those described in US 2016/0264594, US 2009/0203771, and WO 2016/179607.


The compound of formula (VIB) may be prepared from a compound of formula (VIA), a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH.


The compound of formula (VIA) is:




embedded image


where


each R10, R13, and P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;


A1 is H or —OP″;


Y1 is chloro, bromo, iodo, trifluoromethanesulfonate, or trialkylsilane; and


R10A is as described for the compound of formula (VIB).


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image


where


RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),

    • where
    • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
    • or
    • m is 0, and
    • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
    • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIB).


The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image


where RS is silyl;


The compound of formula (IIIC) is:

R4C-R7,  (IIIC)


where


R4C is




embedded image



where RC is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, and each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and R7 is —CHO or




embedded image



where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl;


Preparation of the compound of formula (VIB) includes a Sakurai reaction between RE that is —CHO and the compound of formula (IIB) producing a group of the structure:




embedded image



This product may then be reacted with the compound of formula (IIIC) under Prins reaction condition to produce a group of the structure:




embedded image



This group may be converted to




embedded image



as described herein.


If the stereochemistry of the secondary alcohol in the Sakurai reaction product differs from the desired stereochemistry, this group may be subjected to epimerization reaction conditions described herein (e.g., oxidation followed by Corey-Bakshi-Shibata reduction; alternatively, Mitsunobu reaction may be used to invert the stereogenic center).


If RE is —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), preparation of the compound of formula (IVB) may further include conversion of RE to —CHO under acetal deprotecting conditions, e.g., through a reaction with an aqueous Brønsted acid (e.g., when m is 0), or through oxidation using an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group (e.g., when m is 1).


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with a glycol cleaving agent to produce an aldehyde, which may then be reacted with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—COORC to produce R4C that is




embedded image


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce R4C that is




embedded image


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with an allylic reducing agent to produce R4C that is




embedded image



(e.g., producing this R4C may further include an esterification reaction after the reaction with an allylic reducing agent).


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with a 1,2-reducing agent to produce




embedded image


R4C that is




embedded image



may be reacted with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group in




embedded image


In some embodiments, the compound of formula (VIB) is produced from the compound of formula (VIA) and a compound of formula (IG):




embedded image


where


RE1 is




embedded image




    • where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;





and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIB).


The compound of formula (VIA) is reacted with the compound of formula (IG) under Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (VIB). For example, Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction on the compound of formula (VIA) and the compound of formula (IG) can include reacting the compound of formula (VIA) and the compound of formula (IG) with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt.


The compound of formula (IG) may be prepared from the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIB), the compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl.


In further embodiments, the compound of formula (VIB) may be prepared according to the following strategy. The compound of formula (IIIC) may be converted to the compound of formula (IIID) as described herein. Further, the compound of formula (IIID) may be reacted with the compound of formula (VIA) under Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions to produce a compound of formula (VIAa):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIB) and the compound of formula (IIIC).


The compound of formula (VIAa), in which R7 is —CHO, may be reacted with a compound of formula (IIC) and R5OH under Prins reaction conditions to form the compound of formula (VIB).


In yet further embodiments, the compound of formula (VIC) may be prepared according to the following strategy. The compound of formula (IIA), in which RE is —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), may be reacted with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R is —COOH or a metallic or metalloid moiety, to produce a compound of formula (IID):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIC).


For example, the compound of formula (IIA), in which R1 is —CH2(Y), may be reacted with R17—CH2CH═CH2, in which R17 is a metallic or metalloid moiety, to produce the compound of formula (VIC), in which X1 is —CH2—, and X4 is oxo or —(CH(OP12))—. The compound of formula (IIA), in which R1 is —OP6, and P6 is H, may be esterified with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH, to produce the compound of formula (ID), in which X1 is —O—, and X4 is oxo.


The compound of formula (IID), in which RE is —CHO, may be reacted with the compound of formula (IIB) under Sakurai reaction conditions to produce a compound of formula (IIE):




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIC).





The compound of formula (IIE) may be reacted with the compound of formula (VIAa) and R5OH under Prins reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (VIC), in which L5 is:




embedded image


In still further embodiments, the compound of formula (VIE) may be prepared according to the following strategy. The compound of formula (IIA) may be converted to a compound of formula (IIF) through a reaction with R17—CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH or a metallic or metalloid moiety. The compound of formula (IIF) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIE).


For example, the compound of formula (IIA), in which R1 is —CH2(Y), can be reacted with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is a metallic or metalloid moiety, to give the compound of formula (IIF), in which X1 is —CH2—, and X4 is oxo or —(CH(OP12))—. Alternatively, the compound of formula (IIA), in which R1 is —OP6, and P6 is H, can be esterified with R17—CH2CH═CH2, where R17 is —COOH, to give the compound of formula (IIF), in which X1 is —O—, and X4 is oxo.


The compound of formula (IIF), in which RE is —CHO, may be reacted with the compound of formula (IIB) under Sakurai reaction conditions to produce a compound of formula (IIG):




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIE).





The compound of formula (IIF) may be reacted with the compound of formula (VIAa) and R5OH under Prins reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (VIE), in which L6 is:




embedded image


In some embodiments, the compound of formula (VIG) may be prepared according to the following strategy. The compound of formula (IIA) may be converted to a compound of formula (IIH) through a reaction with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—RP, where each RC is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, and RP is H or —COOH. The compound of formula (IIH) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each RC is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and

    • all remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIG).





The compound of formula (IIH), in which X4 is oxo, may be converted to a compound of formula (IIi) through a reaction with the compound of formula (IIB) under Sakurai reaction conditions. The compound of formula (IIi) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIH).


The compound of formula (IIi) may be reacted with the compound of formula (VIAa), in which R10A is —CH2—CH═CH2 or —(CH2)3—OP10, to produce a compound of formula (VIGa):




embedded image


where


R10A is —CH2—CH═CH2 or —(CH2)3—OP10,


L7 is




embedded image


and all remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIG).


The compound of formula (VIGa), in which R10A is —CH2—CH—CH2, may be converted to the compound of formula (VIGa), in which R10A is —(CH2)3—OP10, and P10 is H, by hydroboration/oxidation reaction. Hydroboration/oxidation reactions are known in the art. For example, 9-BBN or thexyl borane may be used for the hydroboration of R10A, and sodium perborate or hydrogen peroxide and base may be used for the oxidation step providing —(CH2)3—OP10, and P10 is H. The compound of formula (VIGa), in which R10A is —(CH2)3—OP10, and P10 is H, may be converted to the compound of formula (VIG).


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. For example,




embedded image



may be converted to




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


C.12-C.13 Bond-Forming Macrocyclization


In still another approach, a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof may be prepared from the compound of of formula (VIIIB):




embedded image


where


X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;
    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R4 and R5 combine to form a double bond;
    • or
    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;


each P9 and R13 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;


RM is




embedded image




    • where

    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl; and

    • X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;





and the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


The compound of formula (VIIIB) can be subjected to ring closing metathesis to produce a compound of formula (VIIIC):




embedded image


where


A1 is H or —OP″, where P″ is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


L is




embedded image



where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond; and


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIIB).


The halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof is then produced from the compound of formula (VIIIC), e.g., according to the methods described in WO 2016/179607.


In general, the fragments may be coupled in any order when forming compound (VIIIB). For example, the C.0-C.1 or O-C.1 bond between fragment (IIA) and fragment (VIIIA) can be formed, as described herein, prior to or after the Sakurai and/or Prins reaction. Similarly, installation of the C.13 olefin may occur before or after any of the Sakurai, Prins, and C.0-C.1 or O-C.1 bond forming reactions.


In one embodiment, the compound of formula (VIIIB) is produced from a compound of formula (VIIIA), a compound of formula (IIA), and a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH. The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image


where R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently-COORC or —SO2RD;


each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;


each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl; and


RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), where

    • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
    • or
    • m is 0, and
    • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
    • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene.


The compound of formula (VIIIA) is:




embedded image


where

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R4 and R5 combine to form a double bond; or
    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;


R9 is —CHO or —COOH; and


each P9 and R13 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group.


The compound of formula (IIIC) is:

R4C-R7,  (IIIC)


where


R7 is —CHO or




embedded image



where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl; and


R4C is




embedded image




    • where RC is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and P7, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image


where RS is silyl.


In certain embodiments, a compound of formula (IIC):




embedded image



is produced from the compound of formula (IIA) and the compound of formula (IIB), e.g., by reacting with a Lewis acid, such as an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof).


A compound of formula (IF):




embedded image



can be produced from the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH, e.g., by reacting with a Lewis acid, such as an oxophilic Lewis acid (e.g., boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof) (which may or may not be different from a Lewis acid used to react compounds of formulas (IIA) and (IIB)).


A compound of formula (IJ):




embedded image



can be produced from the compound of formula (IF). The compound of formula (IF) may be converted to the compound of formula (IJ) using reaction conditions known in the art. For example, the compound of formula (IF) may be reacted with an allylic reducing agent to give the compound of formula (IJ). A non-limiting example of an allylic reducing agent is a palladium complex (e.g., Pd(PPh3)4) in combination with a formic acid salt (e.g., trialkylammonium formate).


The compound of formula (VIIIB) can be produced from the compound of formula (VIIIA) and the compound of formula (IJ) as described herein.


Preparation of the compound of formula (VIIIB) may include an esterification reaction between R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, and R9 that is —COOH. Alternatively, preparation of the compound of formula (VIIIB) may include a reaction between R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y), and R9 that is —CHO (e.g., under Claisen reaction conditions). Oxidation of the Claisen product (X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H) with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group may produce X4 that is oxo. Further desulfonylation or decarboxylation of this compound of formula (VIIIB) may produce the compound of formula (VIIIB), in which X1 is —CH2—.


Alternatively, the compound of formula (VIIIB) may be produced from the compound of formula (IF) and the compound of formula (VIIIA). For example, a compound of formula (VIIID) may be produced from the compound of formula (IF) and the compound of formula (VIIIA) using methods described herein. The compound of formula (VIIID) is:




embedded image


where


RM1 is




embedded image


R5 is optionally substituted acyl;


P13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IF) and the compound of formula (VIIIB).


Alternatively, the compound of formula (VIIID) may be prepared from the compound of formula (IIC) and the compound of formula (VIIIA) as follows. The compound of formula (IIC) may be protected with a hydroxyl protecting group to give a compound of formula (IIJ):




embedded image


where P13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIC).


The compound of formula (IIJ) may be reacted with the compound of formula (VIIIA) using methods described herein to produce the compound of formula (VIIID), in which RM1 is:




embedded image



where P13 is a hydroxyl protecting group.


The compound of formula (VIIID), in which RM1 is




embedded image



and P13 is H, may be reacted with the compound of formula (IIIC) and R5OH under Prins reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (VIIID), in which RM1 is




embedded image


The compound of formula (VIIID) may also be produced according to the following strategy. The compound of formula (IIA) and the compound of formula (VIIIA) may be converted to a compound of formula (VIIIE) using methods described herein. The compound of formula (VIIIE) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIIID) and the compound of formula (IIA).


The compound of formula (VIIID), in which RM1 is




embedded image


may be converted to the compound of formula (VIIIB) as described herein.


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


In certain embodiments, the method includes converting




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


Generally, the C.12 olefin can be introduced at any point prior to the metathesis reaction via several routes. For example if R4C is




embedded image



reaction with an allylic reducing agent can produce a compound in which R4C is




embedded image



which can be reduced with a 1,2-reducing agent (e.g., DIBAL-H) to produce the corresponding aldehyde, which can be reacted with a vinyl nucleophile.


If R4C is




embedded image



the compound can be reduced with a 1,4-reducing agent (e.g., Stryker's reagent), and the product can be reduced with a 1,2-reducing agent (e.g., DIBAL-H) to produce the corresponding aldehyde, which can be reacted with a vinyl nucleophile.


If R4C is




embedded image



the compound can be reacted with a glycol cleaving agent (e.g., NaIO4), (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—COORC (under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions), a 1,4-reducing agent (e.g., Stryker's reagent), and a 1,2-reducing agent (e.g., DIBAL-H) to produce the corresponding aldehyde, which can be reacted with a vinyl nucleophile. Vinyl nucleophiles are known in the art. Vinyl nucleophiles may be prepared in situ or in a separate reaction vessel. Reaction conditions for adding vinyl nucleophiles to carbonyl groups are known in the art.


The compound of formula (VIIIC) can be formed by reacting the compound of formula (VIIIB) with an olefin metathesis catalyst.


The halichondrin macrolide may be produced from the compound of formula (VIIIC) using reaction conditions known in the art and those described herein. For example, the compound of formula (VIIIC) may be reacted with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent to produce the halichondrin macrolide.


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. For example,




embedded image



may be converted to




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


C.13-C.14 Bond-Forming Macrocyclization


In still another approach, a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)) may be prepared from the compound of formula (VIID):




embedded image


where

    • (i) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
    • (ii) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;
    • or
    • (iii) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;


X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—,

    • where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;
      • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
      • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;


X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


A1 is H or —OP″, where P″ is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


Y1 is chloro, bromo, iodo, trifluoromethanesulfonate, or trialkylsilane;


R13 and each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;


RL is




embedded image




    • where

    • R18 is —CHO or —CH2OP7;

    • R5 is optionally substituted acyl; and

    • P7, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;





and the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


The compound of formula (VIID) is then converted to a compound of formula (VIIE):




embedded image


where


L1 is




embedded image




    • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;





each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo or X3, together with the carbon atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIID).


In certain embodiments, the compound of formula (VIID), in which R18 is —CHO, is subjected to Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (VIIE).


The compound of formula (VIIE) may then be converted to a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof using methods described herein and those known in the art, e.g., those described in US 2009/0203771, US 2016/0264594, and WO 2016/179607.


In general, the fragments may be coupled in any order when forming the compound of formula (VIID). For example, the C.0-C.1 or O-C.1 bond in the compounds of formula (VIID) can be formed, as described herein, prior to or after the Sakurai and/or Prins reaction.


In some embodiments, a compound of formula (VIID) is produced from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl.


The compound of formula (VIIA) is:




embedded image


where


R9 is —CHO or —COOH; and


the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIID).


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image


where


R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y),

    • where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;
    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;


and


RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),

    • where
    • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group, or
    • m is 0, and (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
    • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene.


The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image


where RS is silyl


The compound of formula (IIIC) is:

R4C-R7,  (IIIC)


where


R4C is




embedded image


R7 is —CHO or




embedded image




    • where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl; and





the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VIID).


Preparation of the compound of formula (VIID) includes a Sakurai reaction between RE that is —CHO and the compound of formula (IIB) producing a group of the structure:




embedded image



This product may then be reacted with the compound of formula (IIIC) under the Prins reaction conditions to produce a group of the structure:




embedded image



This group may be converted to RL as described herein.


If the stereochemistry of the secondary alcohol in the Sakurai reaction product differs from the desired stereochemistry, this group may be subjected to epimerization reaction conditions described herein (e.g., oxidation followed by Corey-Bakshi-Shibata reduction; alternatively, Mitsunobu reaction may be used to invert the stereogenic center).


If RE is —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), preparation of the compound of formula (VIID) may further include conversion of RE to —CHO under acetal deprotecting conditions, e.g., through a reaction with an aqueous Brønsted acid (e.g., when m is 0), or through oxidation using an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group (e.g., when m is 1).


Preparation of the compound of formula (VIID) may include an esterification reaction between R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, and R9 that is —COOH. Alternatively, preparation of the compound of formula (VIID) may include a reaction between R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y), and R9 that is —CHO (e.g., under Claisen reaction conditions). Further desulfonylation or decarboxylation of this compound of formula (VIID) may produce the compound of formula (VIID), in which X1 is —CH2—.


In some embodiments, preparation of the compound of formula (VIID) includes producing a compound of formula (IIC) from the compound of formula (IIA) and the compound of formula (IIB) (e.g., under Sakurai reaction conditions). The compound of formula (IIC) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA).


The compound of formula (IIC) may be reacted with the compound of formula (IIB), the compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH to produce a compound of formula (IF):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIIC), and R5OH.


Preparation of the compound of formula (IF) may include a Prins reaction between the compound of formula (IIC), the compound of formula (IIC), and R5OH.


The compound of formula (IF) may be converted to a compound of formula (IH):




embedded image


where all variables are described for the compound of formula (IF).


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. For example,




embedded image



may be converted to




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


In certain embodiments, the compound of formula (IF) may be reacted with an allylic reducing agent to produce the compound of formula (IH).


In the reactions described herein, the requisite transformations of groups R4C may be performed using reaction conditions known in the art. In some embodiments, the transformations of groups R4C are as described herein.


C.15-C.16 Bond-Forming Macrocyclization


In one approach, the macrocyclization reaction is a carbon-carbon bond-forming reaction (e.g., olefin metathesis) that provides a C.15-C.16 bond in a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)). A non-macrocyclic intermediate in the synthesis of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)) may be a compound of formula (IVB).


The compound of formula (IVB) is:




embedded image


where


each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • (a1) R10 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
    • (a2) R10 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;
    • or
    • (a3) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;
    • (b1) A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
    • or
    • (b2) A1 is H or —OP″, and:
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″; and
    • (c1) R16 is H, and P8 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;
    • or
    • (c2) R16 and P8 combine to form a double bond;


each P″, when present, is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group


X1 is —O—, —C(Y)2—, —CH(Y)—, or —CH2—, where each Y is independently-COORC or —SO2RD, where each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, and each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;


RG is




embedded image




    • where

    • R5 is an optionally substituted acyl, and

    • X2 is H or —CH2—X2A—CH2—CH═CH2, where X2A is —O—, —C(RH)2—, or —NRI—, where each RH is independently H or —COORJ, RI is an N-protecting group, and RJ is C1-6 alkyl;





and


X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


and the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


In some embodiments, the compound of formula (IVB) is a compound of formula (IVBa):




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described in the compounds of formula (IVB).





The compound of formula (IVB) (e.g., the compound of formula (IVBa)) is converted to the compound of formula (IVC) through an olefin metathesis reaction. The compound of formula (IVC) is:




embedded image


where


L1 is




embedded image




    • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;





and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVB).


The compound of formula (IVC) is then converted to the compound of formula (IVD):




embedded image


where each of A1 and A2 is independently H or —OP″, and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVC).


The compound of formula (IVC) may be converted to the compound of formula (IVD) using reaction conditions known in the art. For example, the compound of formula (IVC) may be reacted with a 1,4-reducing agent to give the compound of formula (IVD).


Preparation of the compound of formula (IVD) may further include reacting the compound of formula (IVA), (IVB), or (IVC), in which P8 and R16 are both H, with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane or a dimethylsulfonium compound) to give the compound of formula (IVA), (IVB), or (IVC), in which R16 and P8 combine to form a double bond (e.g., the compound of formula IVCa)). If P8 is a hydroxyl protecting group, prior to oxidation, the compound of formula (IVA), (IVB), or (IVC) may be treated with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent. In a non-limiting example, preparation of the compound of formula (IVD) includes oxidizing the compound of formula (IVC), in which P is H, R16 is H, with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group (e.g., Dess-Martin periodinane or a dimethylsulfonium compound) to give a compound of formula (IVCa):




embedded image


where all variables are described for the compound of formula (IVC).


The compound of formula (IVD) is then converted to the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof using methods described herein and those known in the art, e.g., those described in US 2016/0264594 and WO 2016/179607.


If the compound of formula (IVD) includes hydroxyl protecting groups as R3 and/or P5, these hydroxyl protecting groups can be removed with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent. For example, a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent may be a fluoride source, if the hydroxyl protecting group is a silyl group.


If, in the compound of formula (IVD), each P9 is H, and X3 is oxo, the synthesis may further involve a reaction with a Brønsted acid (e.g., a Brønsted acid having a pKa of 5±3), e.g., after the reaction of the compound of formula (IVD) with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent (e.g., to convert P9 from a hydroxyl protecting group into H).


If, in the compound of formula (IVD), X3 is oxo, R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond, treatment with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent can provide the compound of formula (IVD), in which R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H.


In general, the fragments may be coupled in any order when forming compound (IVB). For example, the C.0-C.1 or O-C.1 bond between fragment (IIA) and fragment (IVA) can be formed, as described herein, prior to or after the Sakurai and/or Prins reaction. Similarly, installation of the C.15 olefin may occur before or after any of the Sakurai, Prins, and C.0-C.1 or O-C.1 bond forming reactions.


In certain embodiments, the compound of formula (IVB) is produced from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIA), a compound of formula (IVA), and R5OH.


The compound of formula (IVA) is:




embedded image


where


R9 is —CHO or —COOH,


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVB).


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image


where


R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;


RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),

    • where
    • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group, or
    • m is 0, and (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
    • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVB).


The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image


where RS is silyl.


The compound of formula (IIIA) is:

R4A-R7,  (IIIA)


where


R7 is —CHO or




embedded image


where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl; and


R4A is




embedded image


where RC is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl, and each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.


Preparation of the compound of formula (IVB) includes a Sakurai reaction between RE that is —CHO and the compound of formula (IIB) producing a group of the structure:




embedded image



This product may then be reacted with the compound of formula (IIIA) under Prins reaction conditions to produce a group of the structure:




embedded image



This group may be converted to RG as described herein.


If the stereochemistry of the secondary alcohol in the Sakurai reaction product differs from the desired stereochemistry, this group may be subjected to epimerization reaction conditions described herein (e.g., oxidation followed by Corey-Bakshi-Shibata reduction; alternatively, Mitsunobu reaction may be used to invert the stereogenic center).


If RE is —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), preparation of the compound of formula (IVB) may further include conversion of RE to —CHO under acetal deprotecting conditions, e.g., through a reaction with an aqueous Brønsted acid (e.g., when m is 0), or through oxidation using an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group (e.g., when m is 1).


Preparation of RG may include reacting R4A that is




embedded image



with a glycol cleaving agent, and subjecting the resulting product to Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction with (RCO)2P(O)—CH2—COORC to produce R4A that is




embedded image



This reaction may be performed after Sakurai and Prins reactions.


Preparation of RG may further include a reaction of R4A that is




embedded image



with a 1,2-reducing agent and reacting the resulting product with an allyl halide or allyl pseudohalide. This reaction may be performed after Sakurai and Prins reactions.


Group RE may be converted to RG before or after the reaction of the compound of formula (IIA) with the compound of formula (IVA). For example, conversion of RE to RG before the reaction of the compound of formula (IIA) with the compound of formula (IVA) may be carried out via compounds of formulae (IB) and (IC), as described herein. Conversion of RE to RG after the reaction of the compound of formula (IIA) with the compound of formula (IVA) may be carried out via a compound of formula (IVAa):




embedded image


where


X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;
    • each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;


X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and


the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formulae (IIA) and (IVA).


The compound of formula (IVAa), in which RE is —CHO, may be reacted with the compound of formula (IIB) under Sakurai reaction conditions to produce a compound of formula (IVAb):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVAa).


A compound of formula (IVAc) may be produced from the compound of formula (IVAb), the compound of formula (IIA), and R5OH. The compound of formula (IVAc) is:




embedded image


where


RG1 is




embedded image


R5 is optionally substituted acyl, and


the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVAb).


For example, the compound of formula (IVAb) may be reacted with the compound of formula (IIIA) and R5OH under Prins reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (IVAc), in which RG1 is




embedded image


The compound of formula (IVAc) may be converted to the compound of formula (IVB) as described herein.


If the compound described herein (e.g., a Prins reaction product) includes:




embedded image


the synthesis may further include reacting such compound with an allylic reducing agent to produce the group




embedded image


A non-limiting example of an allylic reducing agent is a palladium complex (e.g., Pd(PPh3)4) in combination with a formic acid salt (e.g., trialkylammonium formate).


Alternatively, preparation of the compound of formula (IVB) may include producing a compound of formula (IA) from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIIA), and R5OH. The compound of formula (IA) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIIA), and R5OH.


The compound of formula (IA) may be reacted with the compound of formula (IVA) to form the compound of formula (IVB). For example, the compound of formula (IA) may be converted to the compound of formula (IB), which may then be converted to the compound of formula (IC). The compound of formula (IB) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IA).


Preparation of the compound of formula (IB) may include reacting the compound of formula (IA) with an allylic reducing agent.


The compound of formula (IC) is:




embedded image


where X2 is as described for the compound of formula (IVB), and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IB).


The compound of formula (IVB) may be prepared from the compound of formula (IC) and the compound of formula (IVA) as described herein.


Preparation of the compound of formula (IVB), in which X1 is —C(Y)2—, —CH(Y)—, or —CH2—, may include a reaction (e.g., Claisen reaction) between an intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (IVA), in which R9 is —CHO) and another intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (IIA), (IA), (IB), or (IC), in which R1 is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y)) that was treated with a Brønsted base to produce an intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (IVB), in which X1 is —C(Y)2—, —CH(Y)—, or —CH2—). If X1 in the compound of formula (IVB) is —CH2—, the preparation of the compound of formula (IVB) may further include a desulfonylation or decarboxylation reaction.


Alternatively, preparation of the compound of formula (IVB), in which X1 is —O—, may include a reaction (e.g., an esterification reaction) between an intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (IVA), in which R9 is —COOH) and another intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (IIA), (IA), (IB), or (IC), in which R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H) to produce an intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (IVB), in which X1 is —O—).


Preparation of certain compounds of formula (IVB) or (IVC) may further involve conversion of the compound of formula (IVB) or (IVC), in which A1 is H, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond, into the compound of formula (IVB) or (IVC), respectively, in which R14 and A1 combine to form oxo. In a non-limiting example, the enone in the compound of formula (IVB) or (IVC), in which R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond can be converted into a C.12-C.13 epoxide using a nucleophilic peroxide agent, e.g., t-butyl hydroperoxide, which can then be converted into the compound of formula (IVB) or (IVC), in which A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, using methods known in the art, e.g., by reacting with a bidentate phosphine ligand and a source of Pd(0) (see, e.g., Muzart, J., Eur. J. Org. Chem., 4717-4741, 2011). Thus, the compound of formula (IVB) or (IVC), in which A1 is OP″, can be prepared. Other transformations may involve α-oxygenation to produce the compound of formula (IVB) or (IVC), in which R15 is OP″.


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. For example,




embedded image



may be converted to




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


C.19-C.20 Bond-Forming Macrocyclization


In another approach, the macrocyclization reaction can be a carbon-carbon bond-forming reaction (e.g., olefin metathesis) that provides a C.19-C.20 bond in a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)). A non-macrocyclic intermediate in the synthesis of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)) may be a compound of formula (VB).


The compound of formula (VB) is:




embedded image


where


a designates (R)-stereogenic center, and Z is a sulfonate, chloride, bromide, or iodide; or a designates (S)-stereogenic center, and Z is OR16, where R16 is a hydroxyl protecting group;


X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, where each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;


each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, and X3 is oxo; or both P9 groups and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal;


Y1 is iodide, bromide, or trifluoromethanesulfonate;


each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;


each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;


RK is




embedded image




    • where R5 is optionally substituted acyl;

    • (a1) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;

    • (a2) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond;

    • or

    • (a3) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;

    • (b1) A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;

    • or

    • (b2) A1 is H or —OP″, and:
      • (i) R13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
        • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;





each P″ is independently a hydroxyl protecting group;


and the remaining variables are as described for the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof.


The compound of formula (VB) is then converted to the compound of formula (VC) using reaction conditions known in the art. For example, the compound of formula (VB) may be subjected to Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions known in the art to produce the compound of formula (VC). Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction on the compound of formula (VB) can include reacting the compound of formula (VB) with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt. Ancillary ligands can be used in combination with the metal salts. In a non-limiting example, a substituted 1,10-phenanthroline can be used in combination with a Ni(II) salt. Chiral ancillary ligands can be used to render the reaction stereoselective. In a non-limiting example, chiral N-(dihydrooxazolyl-phenyl)-sulfonamides can be used with a Cr(II) salt to control the stereochemistry of the carbonyl carbon, to which a vinyl nucleophile is added in the course of Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction.


The compound of formula (VC) is:




embedded image


where


L1 is




embedded image




    • where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;

    • b designates (S)-stereogenic center, if a designates (R)-stereogenic center;

    • and

    • b designates (R)-stereogenic center, if a designates (S)-stereogenic center;





and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IVB).


The compound of formula (VC) is then converted to the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof using methods described herein and those known in the art, e.g., those described in US 2016/0264594, US 2009/0203771, and WO 2016/179607.


The compound of formula (VC), in which Z is OR16, R16 is a hydroxyl protecting group ester, a designates (S)-stereogenic center, and b designates (R)-stereogenic center, can be converted to a compound of formula (VD):




embedded image


where a designates (S)-stereogenic center, b designates (R)-stereogenic center, Z is OR16, in which R16 is a hydroxyl protecting group (e.g., R16, together with the atom to which it is attached, combine to form an ester), RH is sulfonyl, and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VC).


The compound of formula (VC), in which Z is OR16, R16 is a hydroxyl protecting group ester, a designates (S)-stereogenic center, and b designates (R)-stereogenic center, may be converted to the compound of formula (VD), e.g., by reacting with a sulfonyl electrophile, such as a sulfonyl chloride or a sulfonyl anhydride. In the compound of formula (VD), a hydroxyl protecting group in Z may be removed, resulting in the formation of the C.16-C.20 furan ring in the structure of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)). In a non-limiting example, the concomitant removal of a hydroxyl protecting group in Z (e.g., if Z is an ester) and the formation of the C.16-C.20 furan ring in the structure of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof may be achieved by the treatment of the compound of formula (VD) with a strong base (e.g., a C1-6 alkoxide (e.g., KOMe)).


The compound of formula (VB), in which Z is a sulfonate, chloride, bromide, or iodide, a designates (S)-stereogenic center, and b designates (R)-stereogenic center, may be converted to the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof (e.g., eribulin or a salt thereof (e.g., eribulin mesylate)) directly upon formation of the compound of formula (VC), e.g., upon the reaction work up and/or purification (e.g., on silica gel).


If the compound of formula (VD) includes hydroxyl protecting groups as R3 and/or P5, these hydroxyl protecting groups can be removed with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent. For example, a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent may be a fluoride source, if the hydroxyl protecting group is a silyl group.


If, in the compound of formula (VC), each P9 is H, and X3 is oxo, the synthesis may further involve a reaction with a Brønsted acid (e.g., a Brønsted acid having a pKa of 5±3), e.g., after the formation of the C.16-C.20 furan ring.


If, in the compound of formula (VC), (VD), or a C.16-C.20 furan cyclization product thereof, X3 is oxo, R13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond, treatment with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent can provide the compound of formula (VC), (VD), or a C.16-C.20 furan cyclization product thereof, in which R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H.


Preparation of the halichondrin macrolides or analogs thereof may further involve conversion of the compound of formula (VC), (VD), or a C.16-C.20 furan cyclization product thereof, in which A1 is H, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond, into the compound of formula (VC), (VD), or a C.16-C.20 furan cyclization product thereof, respectively, in which R14 and A1 combine to form oxo. In a non-limiting example, the enone in the compound of formula (VC), (VD), or a C.16-C.20 furan cyclization product thereof, in which X3 is oxo, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond, can be converted into a C.12-C.13 epoxide using a nucleophilic peroxide agent, e.g., t-butyl hydroperoxide, which can then be converted into the compound of formula (VC), (VD), or a C.16-C.20 furan cyclization product thereof, in which A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, using methods known in the art, e.g., by reacting with a bidentate phosphine ligand and a source of Pd(0) (see, e.g., Muzart, J., Eur. J. Org. Chem., 4717-4741, 2011). Thus, the compound of formula (VC), (VD), or a C.16-C.20 furan cyclization product thereof, in which A1 is OP″, can be prepared. Other transformations may involve α-oxygenation to produce the compound of formula (VC), (VD), or a C.16-C.20 furan cyclization product thereof, in which R15 is OP″.


In general, the fragments may be coupled in any order when forming compound (VB). For example, the C.0-C.1 or O-C.1 bond between fragment (IIA) and fragment (VA) can be formed, as described herein, prior to or after the Sakurai and/or Prins reaction.


In some embodiments, the compound of formula (VB) is produced from a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIIB), and, R5OH, where R5 is optionally substituted acyl.


The compound of formula (VA) is:




embedded image


where


R9 is —CHO or —COOH;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VB).


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image


where


R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently-COORC or —SO2RD;


each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;


each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;


RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m),

    • where
      • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group, or
      • m is 0, and (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
      • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene;


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VB).


The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image


where RS is silyl.


The compound of formula (IIIB) is:

R4B-R7,  (IIIB)


where


R7 is —CHO or




embedded image


where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl, and


R4B is but-3-en-1-yl,




embedded image


where each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group.


Preparation of the compound of formula (VB) includes a Sakurai reaction between RE that is —CHO and the compound of formula (IIB) producing a group of the structure:




embedded image



This product may then be reacted with the compound of formula (IIIB) under Prins reaction conditions to produce a group of the structure:




embedded image



This group may be converted to RK as described herein.


If the stereochemistry of the secondary alcohol in the Sakurai reaction product differs from the desired stereochemistry, this group may be subjected to epimerization reaction conditions described herein (e.g., oxidation followed by Corey-Bakshi-Shibata reduction; alternatively, Mitsunobu reaction may be used to invert the stereogenic center).


If RE is —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), preparation of the compound of formula (VB) may further include conversion of RE to —CHO under acetal deprotecting conditions, e.g., through a reaction with an aqueous Brønsted acid (e.g., when m is 0), or through oxidation using an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group (e.g., when m is 1).


When R4B is but-3-en-1-yl, preparation of the compound of formula (VB) includes conversion of the but-3-en-1-yl group to —(CH2)2—CHO. For example, the but-3-en-1-yl group may be reacted with a dihydroxylating agent to produce R4B that is




embedded image



and cleaving with a glycol cleaving agent.


When R4B is




embedded image



preparation of the compound of formula (VB) includes conversion of




embedded image



to —(CH2)2—CHO, e.g., by reacting with an oxidizing agent capable of converting an alcohol into a carbonyl group.


When R4B is




embedded image



preparation of the compound of formula (VB) includes conversion of




embedded image



to —(CH2)2—CHO, e.g., using a glycol cleaving agent.


If at least one P7 is a hydroxyl protecting group in the compound of formula (IIIB), preparation of the compound of formula (VB) may further include treating with a hydroxyl protecting group removing agent.


Group RE may be converted to RK before or after the reaction of the compound of formula (IIA) with the compound of formula (VA). For example, conversion of RE to RK before the reaction of the compound of formula (IIA) with the compound of formula (VA) may be carried out via compounds of formulae (ID) and (IE), as described herein. Conversion of RE to RK after the reaction of the compound of formula (IIA) with the compound of formula (VA) may be carried out via a compound of formula (VAa):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formulae (IIA) and (VA).


The compound of formula (VAa) may be reacted with the compound of formula (IIB) under Sakurai reaction conditions to produce a compound of formula (VAb):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (VA).


A compound of formula (VAc) may be prepared from the compound of formula (VAb), the compound of formula (IIIB), and R5OH through Prins reaction. The compound of formula (VAc) is:




embedded image


where


RK1 is




embedded image


and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (VA) and the compound of formula (IIIB).


The compound of formula (VAc) may be converted to the compound of formula (VB) as described herein.


In particular embodiments, the Sakurai reaction product is a compound of formula (IIC):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA).


In certain embodiments, the Prins reaction product is a compound of formula (ID):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIA), the compound of formula (IIIB), and R5OH.


In further embodiments, a compound of formula (IE) may be prepared from the compound of formula (ID) (e.g., the compound of formula (ID) is reacted with an allylic reducing agent to produce the compound of formula (IE)). The compound of formula (IE) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (ID).


The compound of formula (IE) may be reacted with the compound of formula (VA), as described herein, to produce the compound of formula (VB).


Preparation of the compound of formula (VB), in which X1 is —C(Y)2—, —CH(Y)—, or —CH2—, may include a reaction (e.g., Claisen reaction) between an intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (VA), in which R9 is —CHO) and another intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (IIA), (ID), (IIC), or (IE), in which R1 is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y)) that was treated with a Brønsted base to produce an intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (VB), in which X1 is —C(Y)2—, —CH(Y)—, or —CH2—). If X1 in the compound of formula (VB) is —CH2—, the preparation of the compound of formula (VB) may further include a desulfonylation or decarboxylation reaction.


Alternatively, preparation of the compound of formula (VB), in which X1 is —O—, may include a reaction (e.g., an esterification reaction) between an intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (VA), in which R9 is —COOH) and another intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (IIA), (ID), (IIC), or (IE), in which R1 is —OP6, where P6 is H) to produce an intermediate (e.g., the compound of formula (VB), in which X1 is —O—).


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. For example,




embedded image



may be converted to




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


C.23-C.24 Macrocyclization


In another approach, a halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof may be prepared from the compound of formula (IXB):




embedded image


where X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—, each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;


each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;


each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;


L1 is




embedded image



where L2 and L3 combine to form a bond;


R5 is optionally substituted acyl;

    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
    • or
    • A1 is H or —OP″, and
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″; each P9 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group,


X3 is oxo, or X3, together with the atom to which it is attached, combines to form —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; or both P9 and X3, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal; and


R19A is H, —OP″, or Y, and R19B is H; or R19A and R19B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond.


The compound of formula (IXB) can be produced from a compound of formula (IXA), a compound of formula (IIB), a compound of formula (IIA), a compound of formula (IIIE), and R5OH. The compound of formula (IXA) is:




embedded image


where


R9 is —CHO or —COOP″;

    • (a1) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, R11 is alkyl ether, and R12 is H;
    • (a2) R10 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and R11 and R12 combine to form a double bond; or
    • (a3) R10 and R11 combine to form a bond, and R12 is H;
    • A1 and R14 combine to form oxo, R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R15 is H;
    • or
    • A1 is H or —OP″, and:
      • (i) R13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and R14 and R15 combine to form a double bond;
      • or
      • (ii) R13 and R14 combine to form a bond, and R15 is H or —OP″;


RO is —CHO, —CH2OP″, —CH═CH2, —CH(OP″)CH2OP″, —C(O)—CH2P(O)(ORC)2, or halogen;


each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;


each P″ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and


each P9 is independently a hydroxyl protecting group.


The compound of formula (IIA) is:




embedded image


where


R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group, and each Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;


each RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl;


each RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl;


RE is —CHO or —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), where

    • m is 1, and RF is a hydroxyl protecting group,
    • or
    • m is 0, and
      • (i) each RF is independently an alkyl or hydroxyl protecting group, or
      • (ii) both RF combine to form an alkylene.


The compound of formula (IIIE) is:

R4E-R7,  (IIIE)


where R4E is




embedded image


where each P7 is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC, —CH═CH—COORC, —CH2CH2—SO2RD, or —CH═CH—SO2RD; and


R7 is —CHO or




embedded image


where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl.


The compound of formula (IIB) is:




embedded image


where RS is silyl.


In some embodiments, the compound of formula (IXB) is produced according the following strategy. For example, a compound of formula (IXC) may be produced from the compound of formula (IXA), the compound of formula (IIA), in which RE is —CH(1+m)(ORF)(2−m), the compound of formula (IIB), and R5OH, as follows. The compound of formula (IXA) may be reacted with the compound of formula (IIA) to produce a compound of formula (IXC):




embedded image


where


X1 is —CH2—, —CH(Y)—, —C(Y)2—, or —O—;


X4 is oxo, or X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and


the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IXA) and the compound of formula (IIA).


Preparation of the compound of formula (IXC) may include an esterification reaction between R1 that is —OP6, where P6 is H, and R9 that is —COOP″, where P″ is H. Alternatively, preparation of the compound of formula (IXC) may include a reaction between R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y), and R9 that is —CHO (e.g., under Claisen reaction conditions). Further, the compound of formula (IXC), in which X4, together with the atom to which it is attached, is —(CH(OP12))—, where P12 is H, may be oxidized to produce the compound of formula (IXC), in which X4 is oxo. Reaction conditions useful for this oxidation are known in the art. Further desulfonylation or decarboxylation of this compound of formula (IXC) may produce the compound of formula (IXC), in which X1 is —CH2—.


The compound of formula (IXC) may be converted to a compound of formula (IXD):




embedded image


where


R7 is —CHO, —CH2OPA or




embedded image



and


the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IXB).


The compound of formula (IXD) may be prepared from the compound of formula (IXC) and the compound of formula (IIIE) as follows. The compound of formula (IIIE) may be converted to a compound of formula (IIIF):

R4F-R7,  (IIIF)


where R4F is




embedded image



where R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC or —CH2CH2—SO2RD; and


R7 is —CHO or




embedded image



where each R7A is independently an optionally substituted alkyl.


R4E that is




embedded image



may be converted to R4F that is




embedded image



using a glycol cleaving agent.


R8 that is —CH═CH—COORC or —CH═CH—SO2RD may be reacted with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce R8 that is —CH2CH2—COORC or —CH2CH2—SO2RD, respectively.


R4E that is




embedded image



may be reacted with an allylic reducing agent to produce




embedded image



which, upon reduction with a 1,2-reducing agent may produce R4F that is




embedded image


A compound of formula (IXE) may be produced from the compound of formula (IIIF) and the compound of formula (IXC). The compound of formula (IXE) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IXC) and the compound of formula (IXD).


R4F that is




embedded image



where R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC or —CH2CH2—SO2RD, may be reacted with RO that is —CHO under Claisen reaction conditions. This reaction may produce the compound of formula (IXE), in which R19A is Y.


R4F that is




embedded image



may be reacted with RO that is halogen under Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions. This reaction may produce the compound of formula (IXE), in which X3, together with the atom to which it is attached, combines to form —(CH(OP11))—, where P11 is H.


R4F that is




embedded image



may be reacted with RO that is —C(O)—CH2P(O)(ORC)2 under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions. This reaction may produce the compound of formula (IXE), in which R19A and R19B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a double bond.


The compound of formula (IXE) may be converted to the compound of formula (IXD) by reacting with the compound of formula (IIB) under Sakurai reaction conditions.


The compound of formula (IXD), in which R7 is —CHO, may reacted with R5OH under Prins reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (IXB), in which L1 is:




embedded image


In further embodiments, the compound of formula (IXD) may be prepared by reacting the compound of formula (IXC), in which RE is —CHO, with a compound of formula (IIB) to produce a compound of formula (IXF):




embedded image


where P13 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group; and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IXC).


The compound of formula (IXD) may be produced from the compound of formula (IXF) and the compound of formula (IIIF) as described herein. Preparation of the compound of formula (IXD) may further include converting P13 that is a hydroxyl protecting group to P13 that is H.


In yet further embodiments, the compound of formula (IXD) may be prepared as follows. A compound of formula (IXG) may be prepared from the compound of formula (IXA) and the compound of formula (IIIF) using methods described herein. The compound of formula (IXG) is:




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (IXD) and the compound of formula (IXA).


The compound of formula (IXE) may be prepared from the compound of formula (IXG) and the compound of formula (IIA) using methods described herein. Preparation of the compound of formula (IXD) from the compound of formula (IXE) is then carried out as described herein.


The compound of formula (IXD) may be prepared from the compound of formula (IXG) and the compound of formula (IIC). For example, the compound of formula (IIC) may be protected with a hydroxyl protecting group to produce a compound of formula (IIJ):




embedded image


where P13 is a hydroxyl protecting group, and the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (IIC).


The compound of formula (IXD) may be produced from the compound of formula (IIJ) and the compound of formula (IXG) using methods described herein.


In general, the methods described herein can include reacting RE that is —CHO with the compound of formula (IIB) and a first Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid) to produce a group of the structure:




embedded image



which may be reacted with R7, R5OH, and a second Lewis acid (e.g., an oxophilic Lewis acid) (same as or different from the first Lewis acid) to produce a group of the structure:




embedded image


In other embodiments, R1 that is —OP6 is reacted with R9 under esterification reaction conditions to produce a group of the structure —X1—C(O)—, where P6 is H, R9 is —COOH, and X1 is —O—. Alternatively, R1 that is —CH(Y)2 or —CH2(Y) is reacted with Re under Claisen reaction conditions to produce a group of the structure —X1—C(O)—, where R9 is —CHO, and X1 is —C(Y)2— or —CH(Y)—.


The compound of formula (IXB) may also be accessed using methods and compounds described in PCT/US17/40401.


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. In certain embodiments, the compound of formula (IXB) is reacted with an allylic reducing agent to produce the halichondrin or analog thereof.


In general, the method described herein includes an allylic reduction at C.25. This reaction can be performed at any point prior to the formation of the halichondrin macrolide or analog thereof. For example,




embedded image



may be converted to




embedded image



using an allylic reducing agent.


Compounds of Formula (Z) and (Z8)


Compounds of formula (Z) and (Z8) may be used as the compound of formula (III) in the syntheses described herein.


Compound of Formula (Z)


The compound of formula (Z) is:




embedded image




    • where R7 is —CHO or







embedded image




    •  and
      • each R7A is independently alkyl or a hydroxyl protecting group; or
      • both R7A combine to form an optionally substituted alkylene.





The compound of formula (Z) may be prepared as described herein. For example, a compound of formula (Z2) may be produced from a compound of formula (Z1) and




embedded image



where each R19 is independently optionally substituted alkyl.


The compound of formula (Z1) is:




embedded image




    • where

    • each R20A is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20A, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • each R20B is independently a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo;

    • P12A is H;

    • P12B is H or a hydroxyl protecting group.





The compound of formula (Z2) is:




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (Z1).





The compound of formula (Z1) may be reacted with




embedded image



under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (Z2).


A compound of formula (Z3) may be produced from the compound of formula (Z2) and




embedded image



in which each R21 is independently optionally substituted alkyl. The compound of formula (Z3) is:




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (Z2) and for







embedded image


The compound of formula (Z2) may be reacted with




embedded image



under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (Z3).


The compound of formula (Z3) may be converted to the compound of formula (Z4):




embedded image




    • where X5 is a halogen, and

    • the remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (Z3).





The free hydroxyl in the compound of formula (Z3) may be substituted with a halogen (e.g., iodide) as described herein. Reaction conditions for halogen substitution with a halogen are known in the art. In a non-limiting example, the compound of formula (Z3) may reacted with a sulfonyl anhydride (e.g., trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride or methanesulfonic anhydride) to produce the corresponding sulfonate (e.g., trifluoromethanesulfonate or methanesulfonate), which, upon reaction with a halide source (e.g., alkali iodide), may produce the compound of formula (Z4).


The compound of formula (Z4) may be converted to the compound of formula (Z5):




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (Z4).





The compound of formula (Z4) may be subjected to reductive metal conditions to produce the compound of formula (Z5). Reductive metal conditions are known in the art. In a non-limiting example, the compound of formula (Z4) may be reacted with a metal capable of inserting into carbon-halogen bonds (e.g., Zn(0) or an alkyl lithium (e.g., t-BuLi) in combination with a Brønsted acid (e.g., acetic acid) to produce the compound of formula (Z5). When the metal is Zn(0), the Brønsted acid is an ingredient of the reaction mixture. When the reaction is performed with an alkyl lithium, the Brønsted acid is added to quench the reaction.


The compound of formula (Z5) may be reacted with R7AOH to produce the compound of formula (Z6):




embedded image




    • where R7A is as described for the compound of formula (Z).





The compound of formula (Z5) may be reacted with R7AOH in the presence of a Brønsted acid to produce the compound of formula (Z6).


A compound of formula (Z7) may be produced from the compound of formula (Z6) and




embedded image



in which each R22 is independently optionally substituted alkyl. The compound of formula (Z7) is:




embedded image




    • where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (Z) and for







embedded image


The compound of formula (Z6) may be reacted with a glycol cleaving agent to produce aldehyde (Z6A):




embedded image


where all variables are as described for the compound of formula (Z5).


The aldehyde (Z6A) can be reacted with




embedded image



in which each R22 is independently optionally substituted alkyl, under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions to produce the compound of formula (Z7).


The compound of formula (Z) may be produced from the compound of formula (Z7). In a non-limiting example, the compound of formula (Z7) may be reacted with a 1,4-reducing agent to produce the compound of formula (Z).


Compound of Formula (Z8)


The compound of formula (Z8) is:




embedded image


where


R7 is —CHO or




embedded image



and

    • each R7A is independently alkyl or a hydroxyl protecting group; or
    • both R7A combine to form an optionally substituted alkylene;


R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC, —CH═CH—COORC, —CH2CH2—SO2RD, or —CH═CH—SO2RD;


RC, when present, is independently optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and


RD, when present, is independently optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl.


The compound of formula (Z8) may be prepared from the compound of formula (Z5) as follows.


The compound of formula (Z5) may be reacted with R7AOH in the presence of a Brønsted acid to produce the compound of formula (Z5A):




embedded image


where


R20A is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;


each R20B is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group, or both R20B, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form an acetal, ketal, cyclic carbonate, dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; and all remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (Z8).


The compound of formula (Z5A) may be converted to a compound of formula (Z5B):




embedded image


where


R23 is H or —OR20A; and


all remaining variables are as described for the compound of formula (Z8). The compound of formula (Z5A), in which both R20B are H, can be reacted with a glycol cleaving agent to produce the compound of formula (Z5B). Conversion of —OR20A in formula (Z5A) to H in the compound of formula (Z5B) (R23 is H) can be achieved using allylic deoxygenation methods known in the art, e.g., using allylic reducing agents, when R20A is a hydroxyl protecting group that is an ester. Alternatively, when R20A is H, —OR20A may be converted to H using deoxygenation reactions known in the art. Deoxygenation reactions are known in the art, e.g., Barton-McCombie deoxygenation and tin-free versions thereof (see, e.g., Chenneberg and Ollivier, Chimia, 70:67-76, 2016). The reaction replacing —OR20A with H can be performed before or after the glycol cleavage.


The compound of formula (Z5B) may be converted to the compound of formula (Z8), in which R8 is —CH═CH—COORC or —CH═CH—SO2RD, by a reaction with




embedded image



in which each R22 is independently optionally substituted alkyl, under Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction conditions. The compound of formula (Z8), in which R8 is —CH═CH—COORC or —CH═CH—SO2RD, can be converted to the compound of formula (Z8), in which R8 is —CH2CH2—COORC or —CH2CH2—SO2RD, respectively, by a reaction with a 1,4-reducing agent. A reaction replacing —OR20A with H can be performed before or after the Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction and/or the reaction with a 1,4-reducing agent.


Further Compounds


The invention provides a compound of formula (II):




embedded image


where

    • each of D and D′ is independently H, optionally substituted alkyl, or OP1, provided that only one of D and D′ is OP1, where P1 is H, alkyl, a hydroxyl protecting group, and A is a C1-6 saturated or C2-6 unsaturated hydrocarbon skeleton, the skeleton being unsubstituted or having from 1 to 10 substituents independently selected from the group consisting of cyano, halo, azido, oxo, and Q1, or A is a group of formula (1):




embedded image




    • where
      • L is —(CH(OP2))—, —(C(OH)(OP2))—, or —C(O)—;
      • R2 is H and P1 is absent, H, alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, or R2 and P1 combine to form a bond;
        • (i) R3 is H, and P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group;
        • (ii) R3 is —(CH2)nNP3P4, where P3 is H or an N-protecting group, and (a) P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P4 is H or an N-protecting group, (b) P2 and P4 combine to form an alkylidene, or (c) each of P2 and P4 is H;
        • (iii) R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, where P2 is absent, H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group, and P6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or a hydroxyl protecting group; or P2 and P5, together with the atoms to which each is attached, combine to form a ketal, a cyclic carbonate, a dicarbonyl-dioxo, or silylene-dioxo; or
        • (iv) R3 and P2 combine to form an optionally substituted ethylene or a structure selected from the group consisting of:







embedded image








        •  where each P′ is independently H or a hydroxyl protecting group;



      • E is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted alkoxy;

      • G is O, S, CH2, or NRN, where RN is H, an N-protecting group, or optionally substituted alkyl;

      • each Q1 is independently ORA, SRA, SO2RA, OSO2RA, NRBRA, NRB(CO)RA, NRB(CO)(CO)RA, NRB(CO)NRBRA, NRB(CO)ORA, (CO)ORA, O(CO)RA, (CO)NRBRA, or O(CO)NRBRA, where each of RA and RB is independently H, alkyl, haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, aminoalkyl, aryl, haloaryl, hydroxyaryl, alkoxyaryl, arylalkyl, alkylaryl, haloarylalkyl, alkylhaloaryl, (alkoxyaryl)alkyl, heterocyclic radical, or heterocyclic radical-alkyl;

      • n, when present, is 0, 1, or 2;

      • k is 0 or 1;



    • R1 is —OP6, —CH(Y)2, or —CH2(Y), where P6 is H or a hydroxyl protecting group;

    • R6 is H, optionally substituted alkyl, or optionally substituted aryl; and

    • Y is independently —COORC or —SO2RD;

    • RC, when present, is optionally substituted alkyl, optionally substituted aryl, or optionally substituted arylalkyl; and

    • RD, when present, is optionally substituted aryl or optionally substituted non-enolizable alkyl.





The invention also provides the compounds of formula (IID), (IIE), (IIF), (IIG), (IIH), (IIi), (IVAb), (VAb), (VIIAa), (VIAa), (VIIID), (IXD), (IXF), (IXG), (Z), (Z1), (Z2), (Z3), (Z4), (Z5), (Z5A), (Z5B), or (Z6).


Amination


Compounds disclosed herein, in which R3 is —(CH2)nOP5, can be aminated to afford eribulin, as described herein. Amination conditions can be those known in the art. In a non-limiting example, C.35 hydroxyl in the compounds disclosed herein can be sulfonylated (e.g., by a reaction with a sulfonyl anhydride or a sulfonyl chloride) and reacted with a nitrogen source (e.g., ammonia, azide, sulfamic acid, urea (H2NCONH2), or thiourea (H2NCSNH2)) to afford eribulin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof upon optional unmasking of the amino group (if the nitrogen source was azide, urea, or thiourea). In another non-limiting example, C.35 hydroxyl in the compounds disclosed herein can be halogenated (e.g., by Appel reaction or a reaction with thionyl chloride, sulfuryl chloride, phosphorus(III) chloride, or phosphorus(V) oxychloride) and reacted with a nitrogen source (e.g., ammonia, azide, sulfamic acid, a phthalimide salt, urea (H2NCONH2), or thiourea (H2NCSNH2)) to afford eribulin or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof upon optional unmasking of the amino group (if the nitrogen source was azide, a phthalimide salt, urea, or thiourea). Amino unmasking agents are further described herein. The amination reaction can provide a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eribulin directly. Alternatively, the amination reaction can provide eribulin in a free base form. A pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eribulin can be prepared from eribulin through a salification reaction as described herein.


Masked Amines and Amine Unmasking Agents


The compounds used in the methods of the invention can contain a masked or unmasked amine (e.g., at C.35 carbon of the structure of the halichondrin macrolide analog, such as eribulin). An unmasked amine is —NH2. An amine can be masked using methods known in the art, e.g., by protecting the amine with an N-protecting group. Alternatively, an amine can be masked as a nitrogen-containing moiety, which can be reacted with an amine unmasking agent to afford an amine. Non-limiting examples of the nitrogen-containing moieties include azide and an imide (e.g., phthalimide). Amine unmasking agents can be those known in the art for removing N-protecting groups from amines. In a non-limiting example, a Boc group can be removed using amine unmasking agents known in the art, e.g., a Brønsted acid (e.g., HCl in 1,4-dioxane or trifluoroacetic acid). When amine is masked as azide, the amine can be unmasked by subjecting the compound containing the masked amine to Staudinger reaction conditions (e.g., by contacting with a phosphine, such as trialkylphosphine, dialkylarylphosphine, alkyldiarylphosphine, or triarylphosphine) or by reacting the compound containing the masked amine with a reducing agent (e.g., LiAlH4). When amine is masked as an imide (e.g., phthalimide), the amine can be unmasked by reacting with an amine unmasking agent known in the art, e.g., hydrazine.


Oxidizing Agents Capable of Converting an Alcohol to a Carbonyl Group


Oxidizing agents capable of converting an alcohol to a carbonyl group are known in the art. Non-limiting examples of these oxidizing agents include Dess-Martin periodinane, TEMPO (in the presence of bleach or BAIB), a dimethylsulfonium compound (e.g., dimethylchlorosulfonium chloride), aluminum trialkoxide with an excess of a ketone (e.g., acetone), and catalytic tetrapropylammonium perruthenate (TPAP) (in the presence of N-methylmorpholine oxide). The dimethylsulfonium compound can be prepared in situ under the conditions known for Parikh-Doering oxidation, Swern oxidation, Corey-Kim oxidation, or Pfitzner-Moffatt oxidation. Alternatively, the dimethylsulfonium compound can be prepared in situ by a reaction between trichloroacetic acid anhydride and dimethyl sulfoxide. An oxidation reaction of an alcohol to a carbonyl group (e.g., a ketone) can be performed using aluminum trialkoxide and an excess of a ketone (e.g., acetone) under the conditions known in the art for Oppenauer oxidation. Allylic and benzylic alcohols can also be oxidized with MnO2.


Reducing Agents


Reducing agents that can be used in the methods of the invention are those known in the art. A reducing agent can be an electron-transfer reducing agent, a metal hydride, or a metalloid hydride. Non-limiting examples of electron-transfer reducing agent include alkali metals in oxidation state (0), alkali earth metals in oxidation state (0), alkali arenides, lanthanide (II) salts (e.g., SmI2), Zn(0), Fe(0), and Mn(0). Non-limiting examples of metal hydrides and metalloid hydrides include boron hydride compounds (e.g., NaBH4, LiBH4, LiHBEt3, selectrides (e.g., L-selectride), and boranes (e.g., 9-BBN and alpine borane)), aluminum hydride compounds (e.g., LiAlH4, Red-Al®, and alanes (e.g., diisobutylaluminum hydride (DIBAL))), hydrosilanes (e.g., PMHS and Ph2SiH2), hydrostannanes (e.g., Bu3SnH), copper hydride complexes (e.g., Stryker's reagent), palladium hydride complexes, platinum hydride complexes, iridium hydride complexes, rhodium hydride complexes, and ruthenium hydride complexes. Reducing agents can be formed in situ, e.g., a copper hydride complex can be formed by a reaction of a copper salt with, e.g., a boron hydride compound or a hydrosilane. Thus, some reducing reagents (e.g., boron hydride compounds, hydrosilanes, and hydrostannanes) can be used in combination with a catalytic quantity of a metal salt (e.g., Cu, Pd, Pt, Ir, Rh, or Ru salt). Alternatively, catalytic reducing agents can be metal salts (e.g., aluminum isopropoxide or a ruthenium complex) in combination with an alcohol, which undergo transfer hydrogenation of carbonyl-containing compounds without intermediacy of a metal hydride. Non-limiting examples of transfer hydrogenation reactions include Meerwein-Ponndorf-Verley reduction (e.g., using aluminum isopropoxide/isopropanol) and Ru-catalyzed transfer hydrogenation (e.g., Hashiguchi et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 117:7562-7563, 1995).


When a substrate is an α,β-unsaturated carbonyl or sulfone compound (e.g., an α,β-enone or a vinyl sulfone), a reducing agent can be a 1,2-reducing agent or a 1,4-reducing agent. For example, a reaction between an α,β-unsaturated carbonyl compound and a 1,2-reducing agent can afford, e.g., an allylic alcohol (or an allylic amine, if the starting compound is an enamide), whereas a reaction between an α,β-unsaturated carbonyl compound and a 1,4-reducing agent can afford an α,β-saturated compound and can leave the carbonyl group intact after work up of the reaction mixture. Non-limiting examples of 1,2-reducing agents include metal hydrides and metalloid hydrides, e.g., aluminum hydride compounds, boron hydride compounds (e.g., CeCl3 with NaBH4), and ruthenium hydride complexes. Non-limiting examples of 1,4-reducing agents include boron hydride compounds (e.g., LiHBEt3 and L-selectride), hydrostannanes, copper hydride complexes (e.g., Stryker's reagent), palladium hydride complexes, platinum hydride complexes, iridium hydride complexes, rhodium hydride complexes, and ruthenium hydride complexes. Non-limiting examples of the 1,4-reducing agents include copper (I) hydrides, which can be isolated (e.g., Stryker's reagent) or prepared in situ (e.g., from a copper (I) or copper (II) salt and a hydride source). Catalytic quantities of a copper salt (either copper (I) or copper (II) salt) in combination with stoichiometric or superstoichiometric quantities of a hydride source (e.g., a borohydride salt, borane, PMHS, or a hydrosilane (e.g., Ph2SiH2)). A non-limiting example of the reaction conditions that can be used for 1,4-reduction is described, e.g., in Baker et al., Org. Lett., 10:289-292, 2008, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Other metals can be used to catalyze 1,4-reduction, e.g., Ru, Pd, and Ir compounds.


Methods of the invention may include the use of selective reduction techniques to reduce some reactive groups with retention of other reactive groups. For example, a carboxylic acid may be reduced in the presence of esters and/or olefins using sodium borohydride and iodine. Alternatively, a carboxylic acid may be reduced in the presence of esters and/or 1,1-disubstituted olefins by converting the carboxylic acid to a mixed anhydride (e.g., using N-methylmorpholine and i-butylchloroformate) and reducing the resulting mixed anhydride using borane reducing agents (e.g., 9-BBN).


A compound having an allylic leaving group (e.g., a carboxylate, a halide, or a sulfonate) can be treated with an allylic reducing agent to replace the leaving group with a hydrogen atom. A non-limiting example of allylic reducing agent is a palladium salt or complex (e.g., Pd(PPh3)4) in combination with a formic acid salt (e.g., trialkylammonium formate).


Hydroxyl Protecting Groups and Hydroxyl Protecting Group Removing Agents


Hydroxyl protecting groups can be as defined herein. In particular, a hydroxyl protecting group can be an acyl, a sulfonyl, an arylalkyl (e.g., benzyl or p-methoxybenzyl), an aryl (e.g., p-methoxyphenyl), or an optionally substituted silyl (e.g., TMS, TES, TBS, TIPS, TBDPS, or TPS). Hydroxyl protecting groups, hydroxyl protecting agents, and hydroxyl protecting reaction conditions can be selected to protect selectively certain hydroxyl groups in a compound, while leaving other hydroxyl groups unprotected. The choice of hydroxyl protecting groups for a compound can facilitate subsequent deprotection strategies, as some hydroxyl protecting groups can be removed in the presence of others using appropriate hydroxyl protecting group removing agents. Some of these strategies involving the choice of silyl hydroxyl protecting groups are discussed in, e.g., Silicon-Based Blocking Agents, Gelest, Inc., 2011.


Hydroxyl protecting group removing agents are those agents that can react with a compound having a protected hydroxyl group to afford the compound with a deprotected hydroxyl group. Hydroxyl protecting group removing agents and deprotection reaction conditions can be those known in the art. In a non-limiting example, hydroxyl masked as silyl ether can be unmasked by a reaction with a fluoride source (e.g., a fluoride salt, such as KF or TBAF). Alternatively, hydroxyl protected as TMS or TES ether can be deprotected by a reaction with a Brønsted acid (e.g., a carboxylic acid). In another non-limiting example, hydroxyl protected as an ester can be deprotected by a reaction with a base (e.g., alkali hydroxide (e.g., lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, or potassium hydroxide) or C1-6 alkoxide (e.g., alkali C1-6 alkoxide or alkali earth C1-6 alkoxide)). Alternatively, hydroxyl protected as an ester (e.g., pivaloyl ester) can be deprotected by a reaction with a 1,2-reducing agent (e.g., DIBAL-H). In yet another non-limiting example, hydroxyl protected as an arylalkyl ether (e.g., 1-arylalk-1-yl ether) can be deprotected using a reduction reaction, e.g., with Pd/C and H2 or with Na/NH3. Alternatively, hydroxyl protected as an alkoxy-arylalkyl ether (e.g., MPM ether) can be deprotected by a reaction with 2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyano-1,4-benzoquinone (DDQ). In still another non-limiting example, hydroxyl protected as alkoxyalkyl ether (e.g., 1-alkoxyalk-1-yl) or THP ether can be deprotected by a reaction with a Brønsted acid. Cyclic protected diols, such as acetals or ketals (e.g., as 2-alkyl-1,3-dioxolane, 2,2-dialkyl-1,3-dioxolane, 2-alkyl-1,3-dioxane, or 2,2-dialkyl-1,3-dioxane), can be deprotected by a reaction with a Brønsted acid (e.g., a carboxylic acid).


Decarboxylation and Desulfonylation


The conditions for the decarboxylation reaction can be those known in the art, e.g., Krapcho decarboxylation or a sequence including deprotection, if RC is not H, by converting RC to H and subsequent protodecarboxylation. The conditions for the desulfonylation reaction can be those known in the art. For example, the desulfonylation reaction can include contacting the compound of formula (IA) or formula (IB) or an intermediate downstream of the compound of formula (IA) or formula (IB) with an electron-transferring reducing agent (e.g., SmI2; Cr(III) salt and Mn(0); or Mg(0)). For exemplary desulfonylation conditions, see WO 2009/064029.


Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi Reaction


Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction conditions that may be used in transformation described herein can be those known in the art. Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction can include reacting substrates (an aldehyde and a vinyl halide or pseudohalide) with a Cr(II) salt and a Ni(II) salt. Ancillary ligands can be used in combination with the metal salts. In a non-limiting example, a substituted 1,10-phenanthroline can be used in combination with a Ni(II) salt. Chiral ancillary ligands can be used to render the reaction stereoselective. In a non-limiting example, chiral N-(dihydrooxazolyl-phenyl)-sulfonamides can be used with a Cr(II) salt to control the stereochemistry of the carbonyl carbon, to which a vinyl nucleophile is added in the course of Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction.


Olefin Metathesis


Olefin metathesis catalysts are known in the art and include Ru-carbene complexes (e.g., Grubbs and Hoveyda-Grubbs catalysts). Olefin metathesis-competent catalysts that may be used in the olefin metathesis reactions described herein are known in the art (e.g., second generation Hoveyda-Grubbs-type catalysts, e.g., those in which the Ru-benzylidene moiety is modified to include electron-withdrawing and/or electron-donating groups). Non-limiting examples of the useful olefin metathesis reaction conditions are provided in, e.g., U.S. patent application publication No. 2016/0264594 and International patent application publication No. WO 2016/179607.


Salification


Eribulin mesylate can be produced by salification of eribulin, as described herein. Salification reaction conditions are known in the art. Salification of eribulin can afford a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eribulin (e.g., eribulin mesylate). In particular, salification reaction can involve contacting eribulin with a Brønsted acid (e.g., a pharmaceutically acceptable Brønsted acid (e.g., methanesulfonic acid)) to afford a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of eribulin (e.g., Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties, Selection and Use, ed.: Stahl and Wermuth, Wiley-VCH/VHCA, Weinheim/Zurich, 2002). Pharmaceutically acceptable salts of eribulin, e.g., eribulin mesylate, can be formed by methods known in the art, e.g., in situ during the final isolation and purification of the compound or separately by reacting the free base group with a suitable organic acid. In one example, eribulin is treated with a solution of MsOH and NH4OH in water and acetonitrile. The mixture is concentrated. The residue is dissolved in DCM-pentane, and the solution is added to anhydrous pentane. The resulting precipitate is filtered and dried under high vacuum to provide eribulin mesylate.


Epimerizations


Epimerization reactions can be used to invert a stereogenic center having an undesired stereochemical identity. For example, through epimerization, R stereogenic center can be converted to S stereogenic center and vice versa. Epimerization of a stereogenic sp3-carbon bonded to one hydrogen atom and to one hydroxyl group can be achieved through a reaction sequence involving oxidation of the hydroxyl group to a carbonyl group followed by a 1,2-reduction reaction. The 1,2-reduction reaction can provide the desired stereochemical identity diastereoselectively, or the reaction can be carried out using a chiral catalyst, chiral auxiliary, or a chiral reducing agent. Non-limiting examples of chiral reducing agents include alpine borane and prapine borane. Non-limiting examples of 1,2-reduction reactions involving chiral catalysts are Corey-Bakshi-Shibata reduction, Noyori hydrogenation, and Noyori transfer hydrogenation, The oxidation/reduction reaction sequence can be carried out in situ using dynamic kinetic resolution. A dynamic kinetic resolution can further involve a reaction with a hydroxyl protecting agent, which removes the desired stereoisomer from the reduction/oxidation equilibrium. In a non-limiting example, a dynamic kinetic resolution of chiral secondary alcohols can involve reduction/oxidation equilibration using η5-Ph5CpRu(CO)2H in combination with enantioselective esterification using isopropenyl acetate catalyzed by a lipase enzyme (e.g., lipase B from Candida Antarctica, see, e.g., Martin-Matute et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc., 127:8817-8825, 2005).


The following examples are meant to illustrate the invention. They are not meant to limit the invention in any way.


EXAMPLES
Example 1



embedded image




    • each R is OMe, or

    • both R groups, together with the atom to which they are attached,

    • combine to form a carbonyl.





An exemplary compound of formula (IA) can be prepared as shown in the above scheme. This compound may be useful as an intermediate in the synthesis of a halichondrin macrolide. Compound 1 was treated with compound 2 in the presence of BF3.OEt2 (exemplary Sakurai reaction conditions) to give compound 3.


Compound 5 can be prepared by treating compound 3 with compound 4 in the presence of BF3.OEt2 and methoxyacetic acid (exemplary Prins reaction conditions). Compound 7 can be prepared by treating compound 3 with compound 6 in the presence of BF3.OEt2 and methoxyacetic acid (exemplary Prins reaction conditions).


A halichondrin macrolide can be prepared from compound 5 or 7 using methods and intermediates disclosed, e.g., WO 2016/179607, the synthesis of which is hereby incorporated by reference and described herein. For example, compounds 5 and 7 may be converted to a halichondrin macrolide, as described for the compound of formula (VIIIC) in WO 2016/179607.


Example 2

An exemplary compound of formula (IA) for the synthesis of a halichondrin macrolide analog can be prepared as shown in this Example. Compound 8 was treated with compound 2 in the presence of BF3.OEt2 (exemplary Sakurai reaction conditions) to give compound 9.




embedded image


The scheme above illustrates two exemplary synthetic routes that can be used to access compound 11 from compound 9. In one approach, compound 9 was reacted with Dess-Martin periodinane to afford enone 10, which, upon reduction with either (S)-(−)-2-methyl-CBS-oxazaborolidine and BH3.THF or Zn(BH4)2, provided compound 11 as the major diastereomer. (S)-(−)-2-methyl-CBS-oxazaborolidine is:




embedded image


Trimethyl(2-methylbuta-2,3-dien-1-yl)silane. Lithium chloride (4.0 g, 94 mmol) was charged a round bottom flask and dried with heating under vacuum. After cooling to room temperature, the flask was charged with diethyl ether (100 mL) and copper(I) cyanide (4.0 g, 45 mmol). The mixture was cooled to 0° C. and treated with 1 M TMSCH2MgCl (45.0 mL, 45.0 mmol) over 10 min maintaining the internal temperature below 5° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 h. After cooling to −78° C., the mixture was treated with 2-butynyl p-toluenesulfonate (10.0 g, 44.5 mmol) in 3 portions. The mixture was slowly warmed up to room temperature over 18 h. The reaction mixture was filtered through a celite pad and rinsed with diethyl ether. The filtrate was concentrated with slight vacuum (bath: 10° C.) to give the title compound (4.09 g, 65.3%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 4.51-4.58 (m, 2H), 1.70 (t, J=3.13 Hz, 3H), 1.33 (t, J=2.54 Hz, 2H), 0.06 (s, 9H).




embedded image


(S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((S)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate. A mixture of (S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-3-methoxy-5-(2-oxoethyl)-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (1.61 g, 2.77 mmol) and trimethyl(2-methylbuta-2,3-dien-1-yl)silane (0.78 g, 5.5 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (32 mL) was cooled to −78° C., treated with BF3.OEt2 (0.70 mL, 5.5 mmol) and stirred at −78° C. for 1 h. The reaction was quenched with sat. aq. NaHCO3 (80 mL) and the mixture was extracted twice with MTBE (30 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine (32.1 mL), and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=10% to 50%) to give the title compound (960 mg, 53.5%) and a 1:1 mixture of the title compound and its epimer (631 mg, 35%). 1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 8.04-8.10 (m, 2H), 7.97-8.04 (m, 2H), 7.88-7.96 (m, 2H), 7.64-7.72 (m, 1H), 7.50-7.62 (m, 4H), 7.37-7.48 (m, 4H), 5.54-5.70 (m, 1H), 5.27 (s, 1H), 5.17 (s, 1H), 4.99 (s, 1H), 4.95 (s, 1H), 4.63 (br d, J=8.60 Hz, 1H), 4.57 (d, J=5.08 Hz, 2H), 3.87-3.97 (m, 2H), 3.76-3.85 (m, 1H), 3.41 (s, 3H), 3.01-3.19 (m, 2H), 2.52-2.63 (m, 1H), 2.19-2.35 (m, 2H), 1.93-2.03 (m, 1H), 1.88 (s, 3H), 1.68-1.79 (m, 1H).




embedded image


(S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-3-methoxy-5-(4-methyl-3-methylene-2-oxopent-4-en-1-yl)-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate. A solution of (S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((S)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (0.63 g, 0.97 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (12.6 mL) was treated with sodium bicarbonate (0.16 g, 1.9 mmol) and Dess-Martin periodinane (0.495 g, 1.17 mmol). After stirring at room temperature for 1 h, the reaction was quenched with sat. NaHCO3 (6.3 mL) and 20% (w/v) aq. Na2SO3 (6.3 mL), and extracted twice with MTBE (12.6 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine (6.3 mL), and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=10% to 40%) to give the title compound (378 mg, 60%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 7.98-8.11 (m, 4H), 7.89-7.97 (m, 2H), 7.62-7.72 (m, 1H), 7.50-7.62 (m, 4H), 7.35-7.49 (m, 4H), 5.54-5.69 (m, 3H), 5.08 (s, 1H), 4.97 (s, 1H), 4.57 (d, J=5.08 Hz, 2H), 3.97-4.05 (m, 2H), 3.90-3.96 (m, 1H), 3.49 (dd, J=3.91, 14.07 Hz, 1H), 3.42 (s, 3H), 3.05-3.24 (m, 2H), 2.98 (dd, J=7.03, 17.58 Hz, 1H), 2.47-2.58 (m, 1H), 2.18-2.35 (m, 2H), 1.82-1.91 (s, 3H).




embedded image


(S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((R)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate. (S)-CBS oxazaborolidine (0.056 g, 0.20 mmol) was dissolved in THE (5.8 mL) and treated with 1 M BH3.THF in THF (0.90 mL, 0.90 mmol). The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 1 h. After cooling to −40° C., the mixture was treated with a solution of (S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-3-methoxy-5-(4-methyl-3-methylene-2-oxopent-4-en-1-yl)-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (0.29 g, 0.45 mmol) in THF (5.8 mL) and stirred at a temperature between −30 and −15° C. for 3 h. The reaction was quenched with methanol (0.18 mL) and sat. aq. NH4Cl (15 mL). The mixture was extracted twice with MTBE (29 mL), washed with brine, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=10% to 50%) to give the title compound (120 mg, 41%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 7.95-8.09 (m, 4H), 7.86-7.93 (m, 2H), 7.62-7.72 (m, 1H), 7.49-7.60 (m, 4H), 7.35-7.45 (m, 4H), 5.49-5.59 (m, 1H), 5.30-5.37 (m, 1H), 5.15-5.21 (m, 1H), 4.99 (s, 1H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.58-4.65 (m, 1H), 4.49-4.57 (m, 2H), 3.83-3.97 (m, 2H), 3.77-3.82 (m, 1H), 3.36 (s, 3H), 3.03-3.15 (m, 2H), 2.60-2.70 (m, 1H), 2.26 (t, J=6.44 Hz, 2H), 2.03-2.11 (m, 1H), 1.89 (s, 3H), 1.71-1.83 (m, 1H).


In another approach, compound 9 was subjected to Mitsunobu reaction with 3,5-dinitrobenzoic acid, DIAD, and PPh3 to give compound 13. Alcoholysis of compound 13 with Mg(OMe)2 gave compound 11.




embedded image


(S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((R)-2-((3,5-dinitrobenzoyl)oxy)-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenysulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate. A solution of (S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((S)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (0.33 g, 0.51 mmol) in THE (13.2 mL) was treated with 3,5-dinitrobenzoic acid (0.65 g, 3.1 mmol) and triphenylphosphine (0.80 g, 3.1 mmol). The mixture was treated with DIAD (0.49 mL, 2.5 mmol) and stirred at room temperature for 20 h. The reaction was quenched with sat. aq. NaHCO3 (6.6 mL) and extracted twice with MTBE (9.9 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=10% to 30%) to give the title compound (235 mg, 55%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 9.13-9.17 (m, 2H), 9.10-9.13 (m, 1H), 7.89-7.99 (m, 6H), 7.65-7.72 (m, 1H), 7.50-7.62 (m, 4H), 7.35-7.45 (m, 4H), 5.98-6.08 (m, 1H), 5.36-5.46 (m, 1H), 5.31 (s, 1H), 5.29 (s, 1H), 5.27 (s, 1H), 5.11 (s, 1H), 4.43-4.49 (m, 2H), 3.83-3.92 (m, 2H), 3.69-3.77 (m, 1H), 3.31 (s, 3H), 3.01-3.17 (m, 2H), 2.64-2.75 (m, 1H), 2.28-2.37 (m, 2H), 2.07-2.28 (m, 2H), 1.94 (s, 3H).




embedded image


(S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((R)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate. A solution of (S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((R)-2-((3,5-dinitrobenzoyl)oxy)-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (0.235 g, 0.279 mmol) in methanol (4.7 mL) and THE (0.24 mL) was treated with 6-10% Mg(OMe)2 in methanol (0.22 g, 0.17 mmol) and stirred at room temperature for 1 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with MTBE (23.5 mL) and washed with sat. aq. NaHCO3 (4.7 mL) and brine. The aqueous layer was extracted with MTBE (5 mL). The organic layers were combined, concentrated in vacuo, and purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=10% to 40%) to give the title compound (40 mg, 22%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 7.95-8.09 (m, 4H), 7.86-7.93 (m, 2H), 7.62-7.72 (m, 1H), 7.49-7.60 (m, 4H), 7.35-7.45 (m, 4H), 5.49-5.59 (m, 1H), 5.30-5.37 (m, 1H), 5.15-5.21 (m, 1H), 4.99 (s, 1H), 4.96 (s, 1H), 4.58-4.65 (m, 1H), 4.49-4.57 (m, 2H), 3.83-3.97 (m, 2H), 3.77-3.82 (m, 1H), 3.36 (s, 3H), 3.03-3.15 (m, 2H), 2.60-2.70 (m, 1H), 2.26 (t, J=6.44 Hz, 2H), 2.03-2.11 (m, 1H), 1.89 (s, 3H), 1.71-1.83 (m, 1H).




embedded image


(S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-(((2S,6R)-6-((R)-3,4-bis(benzoyloxy)butyl)-3-((2-methoxyacetoxy)methyl)-4-methyl-5,6-dihydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)methyl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate. A mixture of (S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((S)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (0.035 g, 0.054 mmol) and (R)-5,5-dimethoxypentane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (0.030 g, 0.081 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2.1 mL) was cooled to −30° C. and treated with methoxyacetic acid (0.062 mL, 0.81 mmol) and BF3-OEt2 (0.021 mL, 0.162 mmol). The mixture was stirred at a temperature between −30 and −20° C. for 1.5 h, quenched with sat. aq. NaHCO3 (3.5 mL) and extracted twice with MTBE (3.5 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine (1.8 mL), and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=20% to 50%) to give the title compound (21 mg, 37%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 7.91-8.06 (m, 8H), 7.87 (d, J=7.42 Hz, 2H), 7.60 (m, 1H), 7.45-7.55 (m, 6H), 7.30-7.41 (m, 8H), 5.53-5.65 (m, 1H), 5.42-5.52 (m, 1H), 4.62-4.70 (m, 1H), 4.40-4.57 (m, 5H), 4.05-4.18 (m, 1H), 3.98 (s, 2H), 3.90 (s, 2H), 3.71-3.80 (m, 1H), 3.40 (s, 3H), 3.37 (s, 3H), 3.28-3.36 (m, 1H), 2.97-3.11 (m, 2H), 2.45-2.55 (m, 1H), 2.10-2.28 (m, 2H), 1.82-1.99 (m, 3H), 1.72-1.82 (m, 1H), 1.67 (s, 3H), 1.44-1.63 (m, 4H).




embedded image


embedded image


Compound 14 can be prepared by treating compound 11 with compound 4 in the presence of BF3.OEt2 and methoxyacetic acid (exemplary Prins reaction conditions):




embedded image


(S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-3-methoxy-5-(((2R,6S)-3-((2-methoxyacetoxy)methyl)-4-methyl-6-(2-((2S,5S)-3-methylene-5-(3-(pivaloyloxy)propyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)ethyl)-5,6-dihydro-2H-pyran-2-yl)methyl)-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate. A mixture of (S)-3-((2R,3R,4S,5S)-5-((R)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-3-methylenepent-4-en-1-yl)-3-methoxy-4-((phenylsulfonyl)methyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (71 mg, 0.11 mmol) and 3-((2S,5S)-4-methylene-5-(3-oxopropyl)tetrahydrofuran-2-yl)propyl pivalate (43 mg, 0.15 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (3 mL) was cooled to −30° C. and treated with methoxyacetic acid (0.13 ml, 1.6 mmol) and BF3.OEt2 (0.042 ml, 0.33 mmol). After stirring at −20 to −30° C. for 2 h, the reaction was quenched with sat. NaHCO3 (3.6 mL), and the resulting mixture was extracted twice with MTBE (3.6 mL). The organic layers were combined, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=10% to 40%) to give the title compound (4 mg, 4%). Mass (M+Na+): 757.4


Compound 15 can be prepared by treating compound 14 with an allylic reducing agent (e.g., Pd(PPh3)4/HCO2H/Et3N).


Alternatively, compound 16 can be prepared by treating compound 11 with compound 6 in the presence of BF3-OEt2 and methoxyacetic acid (exemplary Prins reaction conditions). Compound 17 can be prepared by treating compound 16 with an allylic reducing agent (e.g., Pd(PPh3)4/HCO2H/Et3N).


A halichondrin macrolide analog can be prepared from compound 15 or 17 using methods and intermediates disclosed, e.g., WO 2015/066729, the synthesis of which is hereby incorporated by reference and described herein. For example, compounds 15 and 17 may be converted to a halichondrin macrolide analog, as described for the compound of formula (VIIE) in WO 2015/066729.


Example 3



embedded image


embedded image


An exemplary compound of formula (III) can be prepared as shown in the above scheme. Compound 18 was subjected to an aldol reaction with HCHO in the presence of K2CO3 to afford compound 19. Compound 19 was treated with triethyl phosphonoacetate, which was deprotonated with CS2CO3, to afford compound 20.


Compound 21 can be prepared from compound 20 by treating with a 1,2-reducing agent (e.g., DIBAL-H) followed by an alkoxymethyl phosphonate, e.g., diethyl-(methoxymethyl)-phosphonate, under Wittig reaction conditions. Compound 22 can be prepared from compound 21 by treating with a sulfonyl halide or sulfonyl anhydride, e.g., Tf2O, followed by a halide salt, e.g., NaI or KI. Compound 23 can be prepared from compound 22 by treating with a reducing metal, e.g., elemental zinc, and a Brønsted acid, e.g., acetic acid. Compound 24 can be prepared from compound 23 by a reaction with methanol in the presence of a Brønsted acid, e.g., HC. Compound 25 can be prepared from compound 24 by a reaction with a glycol cleaving agent, e.g., NaIO4, followed by a Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction with alkylated phosphonoacetate, e.g., trimethyl phosphonoacetate, that has been deprotonated with a base (e.g., NaH or Cs2CO3). Compound 26 can be prepared from compound 25 by treating with a 1,4-reducing agent (e.g., Stryker's reagent), followed by a cyclization reaction. The cyclization reaction may proceed spontaneously after the 1,4-reduction, e.g., on work-up or during purification.


Example 4



embedded image


An exemplary intermediate of formula (IA) can be prepared from compounds 3 and 26. Compound 3 can be treated with compound 26 in the presence of BF3.OEt2 and methoxyacetic acid (exemplary Prins reaction conditions) to afford compound 27. Compound 27 can be treated with an allylic reducing agent (e.g., Pd(PPh3)4/HCO2H/Et3N) to afford compound 28. Compound 28 can be converted to compound 29 using methods known in the art, e.g., using NaBH4/I2 or by converting the carboxylic acid in compound 28 to a mixed anhydride (e.g., using N-methylmorpholine and i-butylchloroformate) reducing the resulting mixed anhydride using borane reducing agents (e.g., 9-BBN).


A halichondrin macrolide can be prepared from compound 29 using methods and intermediates disclosed, e.g., WO 2016/179607, the synthesis of which is hereby incorporated by reference and described herein. For example, compound 29 can be converted to a halichondrin macrolide, as described for the compound of formula (VIIID) in WO 2016/179607.


Example 5



embedded image


embedded image


An exemplary intermediate of formula (IA) can be preparation from compounds 11 and 26. Compound 11 can be treated with compound 26 in the presence of BF3.OEt2 and methoxyacetic acid (exemplary Prins reaction conditions) to afford compound 30. Compound 30 can be treated with an allylic reducing agent (e.g., Pd(PPh3)4/HCO2H/Et3N) to afford compound 31. Compound 31 can be converted to compound 15 using methods known in the art, e.g., using NaBH4/I2 or by converting the carboxylic acid in compound 28 to a mixed anhydride (e.g., using N-methylmorpholine and i-butylchloroformate) and reducing the resulting mixed anhydride using borane reducing agents (e.g., 9-BBN).


A halichondrin macrolide analog can be prepared from compound 15 using methods and intermediates disclosed, e.g., WO 2015/066729, the synthesis of which is hereby incorporated by reference. For example, compound 15 may be converted to a halichondrin macrolide analog, as described for the compound of formula (VIIE) in WO 2015/066729.


Example 6



embedded image


embedded image


(4-methyl-2,6-cis-diphenyl-5,6-dihydro-2-pyran-3-yl)methyl 2-methoxyacetate. A mixture of trimethyl(2-methylbuta-2,3-dien-1-yl)silane (0.050 g, 0.36 mmol) and benzaldehyde (0.11 mL, 1.1 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (4.0 mL) was cooled to −78° C. and treated with BF3.OEt2 (0.14 mL, 1.1 mmol). The mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 1.5 h. After addition of methoxyacetic acid (0.41 mL, 5.4 mmol), the mixture was warmed to −40° C. and then slowly warmed to −20° C. over 2 h with stirring. The reaction was quenched with sat. aq. NaHCO3 (5.0 mL) and extracted twice with MTBE (5.0 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine (2.5 mL), and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=5% to 15%) to give the title compound (53 mg, 42%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 7.34-7.44 (m, 4H), 7.20-7.33 (m, 6H), 5.31 (br s, 1H), 4.65-4.76 (m, 2H), 4.13-4.23 (m, 1H), 3.87 (d, J=16.41 Hz, 1H), 3.72 (d, J=16.41 Hz, 1H), 3.36 (s, 3H), 2.48-2.63 (m, 1H), 2.16-2.31 (m, 1H), 1.85 (s, 3H).




embedded image


(R)-4-((2R,6S)-5-((2-methoxyacetoxy)methyl)-4-methyl-6-phenyl-3,6-dihydro-2-pyran-2-yl)butane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate. A mixture of trimethyl(2-methylbuta-2,3-dien-1-yl)silane (0.057 g, 0.41 mmol) and benzaldehyde (0.034 mL, 0.34 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) was cooled to −78° C. and treated with BF3.OEt2 (0.13 mL, 1.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred at −78° C. for 1.5 h. After addition of methoxyacetic acid (0.39 mL, 5.1 mmol) and a solution of (R)-5,5-dimethoxypentane-1,2-diyl dibenzoate (0.16 g, 0.44 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1.2 mL), the mixture was stirred at −35° C. for 10 min and warmed up to −10° C. over 2 h. The reaction was quenched with sat. aq. NaHCO3, extracted twice with MTBE (3.6 mL), washed with brine (1.8 mL), and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate in n-heptane=10%, 20% and 30%) to give the title compound (82 mg, 42%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 7.91-8.06 (m, 4H), 7.46-7.59 (m, 2H), 7.32-7.45 (m, 6H), 7.19-7.31 (m, 3H), 5.84-5.93 (m, 1H), 5.07-5.17 (m, 2H), 3.95-4.08 (m, 1H), 3.78-3.87 (m, 2H), 3.70-3.77 (m, 2H), 3.64-3.78 (m, 1H), 3.34 (s, 3H), 2.15-2.31 (m, 2H), 1.95-2.07 (m, 1H), 1.82-1.94 (m, 2H), 1.78 (s, 3H), 1.58-1.76 (m, 1H).




embedded image


N-((4-methyl-2,6-cis-diphenyl-5,6-dihydro-2H-pyran-3-yl)methyl)acetamide. A mixture of trimethyl(2-methylbuta-2,3-dien-1-yl)silane (0.098 g, 0.70 mmol) and benzaldehyde (0.21 mL, 2.1 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) and acetonitrile (2 mL) was cooled to −40° C. and treated with BF3-OEt2 (0.27 mL, 2.1 mmol). The mixture was slowly warmed up to −10° C. over 3 h. The reaction was quenched with sat. aq. NaHCO3 (3.9 mL) and extracted twice with MTBE (3.92 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with brine (4.90 mL), and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel column chromatography (ethyl acetate in N-heptane=10% to 90%) to give the title compound (60 mg, 27%).



1H NMR (400 MHz, CHLOROFORM-d) δ 7.28-7.49 (m, 10H), 5.21 (br s, 1H), 4.72 (dd, J=3.12, 10.93 Hz, 1H), 4.50 (br s, 1H), 3.93 (dd, J=6.44, 14.25 Hz, 1H), 3.41 (dd, J=3.51, 14.06 Hz, 1H), 2.44-2.64 (m, 1H), 2.15-2.28 (m, 1H), 1.83 (s, 3H), 1.64 (s, 3H).


The experiments described herein show that Sakurai and Prins reactions can be performed as a single-pot Sakurai-Prins cascade reaction.


OTHER EMBODIMENTS

Various modifications and variations of the described compositions and methods of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art without departing from the scope and spirit of the invention. Although the invention has been described in connection with specific embodiments, it should be understood that the invention as claimed should not be unduly limited to such specific embodiments. Indeed, various modifications of the described modes for carrying out the invention that are obvious to those skilled in the art are intended to be within the scope of the invention.


Other embodiments are in the claims.

Claims
  • 1. A method of preparing a compound of formula (A), the method comprising producing the compound of formula (A) from a compound of formula (B), a compound of formula (C), and R5OH: wherein R5 is optionally substituted acyl;wherein the compound of formula (A) is:
  • 2. The method of claim 1, wherein the producing the compound of formula (A) comprises reacting the compound of formula (B), the compound of formula (C), R5OH, and a Lewis acid; and/or wherein the compound of formula (B) is produced by reacting a compound of formula (D), a compound of formula (E), and a second Lewis acid, wherein the compound of formula (D) is:
  • 3. The method of claim 2, wherein the Lewis acid or second Lewis acid is an oxophilic Lewis acid.
  • 4. The method of claim 3, wherein the oxophilic Lewis acid is boron trifluoride or a solvate thereof.
  • 5. The method of claim 2, wherein: the Lewis acid and the second Lewis acid are the same; and/orthe preparing the compound of formula (B) and the preparing the compound of formula (A) are performed as a single-pot transformation; and/orthe product of reacting the compound of formula (D), the compound of formula (E), and the second Lewis acid is epimerized.
  • 6. The method of claim 1, wherein: (i)D′ is OP1, wherein P1 is alkyl; and/orD is H; and/orwherein A is of the following structure:
  • 7. A compound of formula (B):
PCT Information
Filing Document Filing Date Country Kind
PCT/US2019/012178 1/3/2019 WO
Publishing Document Publishing Date Country Kind
WO2019/136145 7/11/2019 WO A
US Referenced Citations (61)
Number Name Date Kind
4107206 Hewett et al. Aug 1978 A
5338865 Kishi et al. Aug 1994 A
5436238 Kishi et al. Jul 1995 A
5451573 Hemmerle et al. Sep 1995 A
6194586 Martinelli et al. Feb 2001 B1
6214865 Littlefield et al. Apr 2001 B1
6365759 Littlefield et al. Apr 2002 B1
6469182 Littlefield et al. Oct 2002 B1
6653341 Littlefield et al. Nov 2003 B1
6870058 Smith, III et al. Mar 2005 B2
7470720 Littlefield et al. Dec 2008 B2
7982060 Austad et al. Jul 2011 B2
8093410 Chase et al. Jan 2012 B2
8097648 Littlefield et al. Jan 2012 B2
8119839 Yoshimura et al. Feb 2012 B2
8148554 Seletsky et al. Apr 2012 B2
8203010 Endo et al. Jun 2012 B2
8350067 Endo et al. Jan 2013 B2
8445701 Austad et al. May 2013 B2
8598373 Hu Dec 2013 B2
8618313 Benayoud et al. Dec 2013 B2
8884031 Chase et al. Nov 2014 B2
RE45324 Austad et al. Jan 2015 E
8927597 Endo et al. Jan 2015 B2
8975422 Fang et al. Mar 2015 B2
8987479 Chase et al. Mar 2015 B2
9206194 Hu Dec 2015 B2
9278979 Souza et al. Mar 2016 B2
9303039 Zhang et al. Apr 2016 B2
9303050 Benayoud et al. Apr 2016 B2
9382262 Endo et al. Jul 2016 B2
9469651 Hu Oct 2016 B2
9604993 Chase et al. Mar 2017 B2
9695187 Souza et al. Jul 2017 B2
9695188 Hu et al. Jul 2017 B2
9783549 Fang et al. Oct 2017 B2
9802953 Chase et al. Oct 2017 B2
9856276 Endo et al. Jan 2018 B2
RE46965 Austad et al. Jul 2018 E
10030032 Hu et al. Jul 2018 B2
10214539 Chase et al. Feb 2019 B2
10221189 Fang et al. Mar 2019 B2
10308661 Fang et al. Jun 2019 B2
10344038 Kishi et al. Jul 2019 B2
10450324 Hu et al. Oct 2019 B2
10494388 Endo et al. Dec 2019 B2
RE47797 Benayoud et al. Jan 2020 E
10611773 Fang et al. Apr 2020 B2
10633392 Kishi et al. Apr 2020 B2
10676481 Baran et al. Jun 2020 B2
10717743 Chase et al. Jul 2020 B2
10934307 Fang et al. Mar 2021 B2
20040092581 Burzlaff et al. May 2004 A1
20060045846 Horstmann et al. Mar 2006 A1
20090093649 Nobis Apr 2009 A1
20090104285 Littlefield et al. Apr 2009 A1
20090203771 Inanaga et al. Aug 2009 A1
20180009825 Kovi et al. Jan 2018 A1
20180230164 Kishi et al. Aug 2018 A1
20190161495 Chase et al. May 2019 A1
20190308992 Fang et al. Oct 2019 A1
Foreign Referenced Citations (29)
Number Date Country
0572109 Dec 1993 EP
0642345 Sep 2000 EP
H06-211737 Aug 1994 JP
2010-168320 Aug 2010 JP
2112773 Jun 1998 RU
2517167 May 2014 RU
652180 Mar 1979 SU
WO-9317690 Sep 1993 WO
WO-9809942 Mar 1998 WO
WO-9965894 Dec 1999 WO
WO-2005118565 Dec 2005 WO
WO-2006076100 Jul 2006 WO
WO-2008010776 Jan 2008 WO
WO-2009014105 Jan 2009 WO
WO-2009046308 Apr 2009 WO
WO-2009064029 May 2009 WO
WO-2009124237 Oct 2009 WO
WO-2011094339 Aug 2011 WO
WO-2012147900 Nov 2012 WO
WO-2013078559 Jun 2013 WO
WO-2013142999 Oct 2013 WO
WO-2015000070 Jan 2015 WO
WO-2015066729 May 2015 WO
WO-2016038624 Mar 2016 WO
WO-2016179607 Nov 2016 WO
WO-2017139664 Aug 2017 WO
WO-2018006031 Jan 2018 WO
WO-2018217894 Nov 2018 WO
WO-2019136145 Jul 2019 WO
Non-Patent Literature Citations (113)
Entry
Isagulyants et al., “Condensation of unsaturated compounds with formaldehyde (Prince reaction).” Advances in Chemistry. 37(1): 61-77 (1968).
Search Report issued in Russian Patent Application No. 2019102375, date of completion Jul. 1, 2021 (4 pages).
U.S. Appl. No. 16/684,332, Benayoud et al.
Aicher et al., “Synthetic studies towards halichondrins: synthesis of the C.27-C.38 segment,” Tetrahedron Lett. 33(12):1549-52 (1992).
Aicher et al., “Total synthesis of halichondrin B and norhalichondrin B,” J Am Chem Soc. 114(8):3162-4(1992).
Aicher, Thesis, Chapter 4, “Synthetic studies towards halichondrin B,” Doctor of Philosophy in Chemistry, Harvard University, 35-54, 1989 (26 pages).
AkzoNobel Polymer Chemicals, “Diisobutylaluminum hydride (DIBAL-H) and other isobutyl aluminum Alkyls (DIBAL-BOT, TIBAL) as specialty organic synthesis reagents,” The AkzoNobel Technical Bulletin, 1-14 (2006).
Alley et al. “Comparison of the relative efficacies and toxicities of Halichondrin B analogues,” Proceedings of the AACR-NCI-EORTC Conference on Molecular Targets and Cancer Therapeutics. C230:257 (2005).
Anderson, “Developing processes for crystallization-induced asymmetric transformation,” Org Process Res Dev. 9:800-13 (2005).
Ando et al., “Z-selective intramolecular Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction for the synthesis of macrocyclic lactones,” Org Lett. 12(7):1460-3 (2010).
Austad et al. (2005): STN International HCAPLUS database, Columbus (OH), accession No. 2005: 1313925.
Austad et al., “Commercial manufacture of Halaven®: chemoselective transformations en route to structurally complex macrocyclic ketones,” Synlett. 24 (2013). Supporting Information, (13 pages.).
Austad et al., “Commercial manufacture of Halaven®: chemoselective transformations en route to structurally complex macrocyclic ketones,” Synlett. 24(3):333-7 (2013).
Austad et al., “Process development of Halaven®: synthesis of the C14—C35 fragment via iterative Nozaki-Hiyama-Kishi reaction—Williamson ether cyclization,” Synlett. 24(3):327-32 (2013).
Bai et al., “Halichondrin B and Homohalichondrin B, marine natural products binding in the vinca domain of tubulin. Discovery of tubulin-based mechanism of action by analysis of differential cytotoxicity data,” J Biol Chem. 266(24):15882-9 (1991).
Bernet et al., “Carbocyclische verbindungen aus monosacchariden. Umsetzungen in der glucosereihe,” Helv Chim Acta. 62(6):1990-2016 (1979).
Blanchette et al., “Horner-Wadsworth-Emmons reaction: use of lithium chloride and an amine for base-sensitive compounds,” Tetrahedron Lett. 25(21):2183-6 (1984).
Burke et al., “Enantioselective synthesis of a Halichondrin B C(20) → C(36) precursor,” Tetrahedron Lett. 36(39):7023-6 (1995).
Burke et al., “Synthesis of a C(22)—C(34) Halichondrin B precursor via ring opening—double ring closing metathesis,” J Org Chem. 63:8626-7 (1998).
Burke et al., “Synthesis of a C(22) → C(34) Halichondrin precursor via a double dioxanone-to-dihydropyran rearrangement,” Tetrahedron Lett. 32(32):3961-4 (1991).
Burke et al., “Synthetic studies toward complex polyether macrolides of marine origin,” Spec Publ R Soc Chem. 198:(Anti-Infectives) 73-85 (1997).
Carruthers et al., Main-group chemistry. Modern Methods of Organic Synthesis, Fourth Edition. Cambridge University Press, 65 (2004).
Chase et al., “Process development of Halaven®: Synthesis of the C1—C13 fragment from D-(−)-Gulono-1, 4-lactone,” Synlett. 24(3):323-6 (2013).
Chen et al., “Ni(II)/Cr(II)-mediated coupling reaction: An asymmetric process,” J Org Chem. 60(17):5386-7(1995).
Choi et al., “Asymmetric Ni(II)/Cr(II)-mediated coupling reaction: catalytic process,” Org Lett. 4(25):4435-8 (2002).
Choi et al., “Prins reaction of homoallenyl alcohols: Access to substituted pyrans in the halichondrin series,” Org Lett. 19(22): 6092-5 (2017).
Choi et al., “Supporting information for asymmetric Ni(II)/Cr(II)-mediated coupling reaction: catalytic process,” Org Lett. 4(25) (2002) (8 pages).
Choi et al., “Synthetic studies on the marine natural product Halichondrins,” Pure Appl Chem. 75(1):1-17 (2003).
Cooper et al., “Total Synthesis of Halichondrin B from common sugars: an F-ring intermediate from D-glucose and efficient construction of the C1 to C21 segment,” Tetrahedron Lett. 34(51):8193-6 (1993).
Cunningham et al., “The influence of pH on the kinetic constants of alpha-chymotrypsin-catalyzed esterolysis,” J Biol Chem. 221(1):287-99 (1956).
Dabydeen et al., “Comparison of the activities of the truncated Halichondrin B analog NSC 707389 (E7389) with those of the parent compound and a proposed binding site on tubulin,” Mol Pharmacol. 70(6):1866-75 (2006).
Del Valle et al., “Total synthesis of (+)-trienomycins A and F via C—C bond-forming hydrogenation and transfer hydrogenation,” J Am Chem Soc. 135(30):10986-89 (2013).
Dong et al., “New syntheses of E7389 C14—C35 and halichondrin C14—C38 building blocks: reductive cyclization and oxy-michael cyclization approaches,” J Am Chem Soc. 131(43):15642-6 (2009).
Duan et al., “Synthetic studies on halichondrins: a new practical synthesis of the C.1-C.12 segment,” Tetrahedron Lett. 34(47):7541-4 (1993).
Favretto et al., “Highly regioselective microwave-assisted synthesis of enantiopure C3-symmetric trialkanolamines,” Tetrahedron Letters. 43(14): 2581-2584 (2002).
Fleming et al., “Nitrile anion cyclizations,” Tetrahedron. 58(1):1-23 (2002).
Gesinski et al., “Symmetric macrocycles by a Prins dimerization and macrocyclization strategy,” available in PMC Nov. 1, 2010, published in final edited form as: Org Lett. 11(22):5342-5 (2009) (13 pages).
Gradillas et al., “Macrocyclization by ring-closing metathesis in the total synthesis of natural products: reaction conditions and limitations,” Angew Chem Int Ed Engl. 45(37): 6086-6101 (2006).
Guo et al., “Toolbox approach to the search for effective ligands for catalytic asymmetric Cr-mediated coupling reactions,” J Am Chem Soc. 131(42):15387-93 (2009).
Hirata et al., “Halichondrins—antitumor polyether macrolides from a marine sponge,” Pure Appl Chem. 58(5):701-10 (1986).
Hori et al., “Efficient synthesis of 2,3-trans-tetrahydropyrans and oxepanes: rearrangement-ring expansion of cyclic ethers having a chloromethanesulfonate,” Tetrahedron Lett. 40(11):2145-8 (1999).
Horita et al., “Research on anti-tumor active site of marine source natural product, Halichondrin B,” International Congress Series, 1157 (Towards Natural Medicine Research in the 21st Century), 327-336 (1998).
Horita et al., “Synthetic studies of halichondrin B, an antitumor polyether macrolide isolated from a marine sponge. 2. Efficient synthesis of C16—C26 fragments via construction of the D ring by a highly stereocontrolled iodoetherification,” Synlett. 40-43 (1994).
Horita et al., “Synthetic studies of Halichondrin B, an antitumor polyether macrolide isolated from a marine sponge. 3. Synthesis of C27—C36 subunit via completely stereoselective C-glycosylation to the F ring,” Synlett. 43-45 (1994).
Horita et al., “Synthetic studies of Halichondrin B, an antitumor polyether macrolide isolated from a marine sponge. 7. Synthesis of two C27—C36 units via construction of the F ring and completely stereoselective C-glycosylation using mixed Lewis acids,” Chem Pharm Bull. 45(10):1558-72 (1997).
Horita et al., “Synthetic studies of Halichondrin B, an antitumor polyether macrolide isolated from a marine sponge. 8. Synthesis of the lactone part (C1—C36) via Horner-Emmons coupling between C1—C15 and C16—C36 fragments and yamaguchi lactonization,” Tetrahedron Lett. 38(52):8965-8 (1997).
Horita et al., “Synthetic studies on Halichondrin B, an antitumor polyether macrolide isolated from a marine sponge. 9. Synthesis of the C16—C36 unit via stereoselective construction of the D and E rings,” Chem Pharm Bull. 46(8):1199-216 (1998).
Horita et al., Synthetic study of a highly antitumorigenic marine phytochemical, Halichondrin B. Phytochemicals and Phytopharmaceuticals. Fereidoon Shahidi and Chi-Tang Ho, 386-397 (2000).
International Search Report and Written Opinion for International Application No. PCT/US2019/012178, dated Apr. 15, 2019 (19 pages).
Jackson et al., “A total synthesis of norhalichondrin B,” Angew Chem Int Ed. 48(13):2346-50 (2009).
Jackson et al., “The halichondrins and E7389,” Chem Rev. 109(7):3044-79 (2009).
Jiang et al., “A novel route to the F-ring of Halichondrin B. Diastereoselection in Pd(0)-mediated meso and C2 diol desymmetrization,” Org Lett. 4(20):3411-4 (2002).
Jiang et al., “A practical synthesis of the F-ring of halichondrin B via ozonolytic desymmetrization of a C(2)-symmetric dihydroxycyclohexene,” J Org Chem. 68(3):1150-3 (2003).
Kawaguchi et al., “Drug and crystal polymorphism,” Journal of Human Environmental Engineering. 4(2):310-7 (2002) (10 pages).
Kim et al., “New syntheses of E7389 C14—C35 and Halichondrin C14—C38 building blocks: double-inversion approach,” J Am Chem Soc. 131(43):15636-41 (2009).
Ko, “Prins reactions and applications,” http://gbdong.cm.utexas.edu/seminar/old/Prins%20reactions%20and%20Applications_Haye%20Min%20Ko.pdf, retrieved Jan. 21, 2020, dated Nov. 28, 2012 (30 pages).
Kong et al., “Total synthesis of the spirocyclic imine marine toxin (−)-gymnodimine and an unnatural C4-epimer,” J Am Chem Soc. 133(49): 19844-56 (2011).
Kurosu et al., “Fe/Cr- and Co/Cr-mediated catalytic asymmetric 2-Haloallylations of aldehydes,” J Am Chem Soc. 126(39):12248-9 (2004).
Kurosu et al., “Supporting information for Fe/Cr- and Co/Cr-mediated catalytic asymmetric 2-haloallylations of aldehydes,” J Am Chem Soc. 126(39) (2004) (31 pages).
Lee et al., “Extension of Pd-Mediated One-Pot Ketone Synthesis to Macrocyclization: Application to a New Convergent Synthesis of Eribulin,” J Am Chem Soc. 138(50):16248-51 (2016).
Li et al., “Unified Synthesis of C1—C19 Building Blocks of Halichondrins via Selective Activation/Coupling of Polyhalogenated Nucleophiles in (Ni)/Cr-Mediated Reactions,” J Am Chem Soc. 137(19):6226-31 (2015).
Mattocks, “371. Novel reactions of some alpha-acyloxy acid chlorides,” J Chem Soc. Resumed. 1918-30 (1964).
Mattocks, “932. Novel reactions of some alpha-acyloxy-acid halides,” J Chem Soc. 4840-5 (1964).
Mitsunobu, “The use of diethyl azodicarboxylate and triphenylphosphine in synthesis and transformation of natural products,” Synthesis. 1-28 (1981).
Namba et al., “A simple but remarkably effective device for forming the C8—C14 polycyclic ring system of halichondrin B,” J Am Chem Soc. 126(25): 7770-1 (2004) (10 pages).
Namba et al., “New catalytic cycle for couplings of aldehydes with organochromium reagents,” Org Lett. 6(26):5031-3 (2004).
Narayan et al., “Novel second generation analogs of eribulin. Part II: Orally available and active against resistant tumors in vivo,” Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 21(6):1634-8 (2011).
Newman, “Drug evaluation: eribulin, a simplified ketone analog of the tubulin inhibitor Halichondrin B, for the potential treatment of cancer,” Curr Opin Invest Drugs. 8(12):1057-66 (2007).
Nicolaou et al., “Total synthesis of brevetoxin A: Part 3: construction of GHIJ and BCDE ring systems,” Chem Eur J. 5(2):628-45 (1999).
Nicolaou et al., “Total synthesis of the CP molecules CP-263, 114 and CP-225,917—Part 1: synthesis of key intermediates and intelligence gathering,” Angew Chem Int Ed. 38(11):1669-75 (1999).
PubChem Compound Summary for CID 10501910, <https://pubchem.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/compound/10501910>, created Oct. 25, 2006, retrieved Aug. 30, 2017 (8 pages).
PubChem Compound Summary for Methyl 2-[(1S,3R,4S,5R,7R,8S,9S,11R)-4,8-diacetyloxy-5-(2-oxoethyl)-2,6,10-trioxatricyclo[7.4.0.03,7]tridecan-11-yl]acetate, <https://pubchem.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/compound/10501910>, retrieved Jul. 1, 2020 (6 pages).
Ritter, “Synthetic transformations of vinyl and aryl triflates,” Synthesis: Reviews. 8:735-62 (1993).
RN 185411-09-0, CN L-arabino-D-allo-Dodeconic acid, 3,7:6,10-dianhydro-8,9-O-cyclohexylidene-2,4,5-trideoxy-, methyl ester. Entry Date: Entered STN: Jan. 28, 1997 (1 page).
RN 546141-26-8, CN 1,2-Propanediol, 3-[(2R,3R,4R,5S)-tetrahydro-3-hydroxy-4-[(phenylsulfonyl)methyl]-5-(2-propen-1-yl)-2-furanyl]-, 1,2-dibenzoate, (2S)-. Entry Date: Entered STN: Jul. 11, 2003 (1 page).
RN 546141-39-3, CN 1,2-Propanediol, 3-[(2R,3R,4S,5S)-tetrahydro-3-methoxy-4-[(phenylsulfonyl)methyl]-5-(2-propen-1-yl)-2-furanyl]-, 1,2-dibenzoate, (2S)-. Entry Date: Entered STN: Jul. 11, 2003 (1 page).
RN 546141-40-6, CN 1,2-Propanediol, 3-[(2R,3R,4S,5S)-tetrahydro-3-methoxy-4-[(phenylsulfonyl)methyl]-5-(2-propen-1-yl)-2-furanyl]-, (2S)-. Entry Date: Entered STN: Jul. 11, 2003 (1 page).
Sakamoto et al., “Stereoselective ring expansion via bicyclooxonium ion. A novel approach to oxocanes,” Org Lett. 4(5):675-8 (2002).
Schreiber, “Hydrogen transfer from tertiary amines to trifluoroacetic anhydride,” Tetrahedron Lett. 21(11):1027-30 (1980).
Seletsky et al., “Structurally simplified macrolactone analogues of halichondrin B,” Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 14(22):5547-50 (2004).
Stamos et al., “A mild preparation of vinyliodides from vinylsilanes,” Tetrahedron Lett. 37(48): 8647-50(1996).
Stamos et al., “New synthetic route to the C.14-C.38 segment of Halichondrins,” J Org Chem. 62(22):7552-3 (1997).
Stamos et al., “Ni(II)/Cr(II)-mediated coupling reaction: beneficial effects of 4-tert-butylpyridine as an additive and development of new and improved workup procedures,” Tetrahedron Lett. 38(36):6355-8 (1997).
Stamos et al., “Synthetic studies on Halichondrins: a practical synthesis of the C.1-C.13 segment,” Tetrahedron Lett. 37(48):8643-6 (1996).
Sutherland et al., “The synthesis of 6alpha- and 6beta-fluoroshikimic acids,” J Chem Soc Chem Commun. 18:1386-7 (1989).
Takai et al., “Reactions of alkenylchromium reagents prepared from alkenyl trifluoromethanesulfonates (triflates) with chromium(II) chloride under nickel catalysis” J Am Chem Soc. 108(19):6048-50 (1986).
Tokunaga et al., “Asymmetric catalysis with water: efficient kinetic resolution of terminal epoxides by means of catalytic hydrolysis,” Science. 277(5328):936-8 (1997).
Towle et al., “Halichondrin B macrocyclic ketone analog E7389: medicinal chemistry repair of lactone ester instability generated during structural simplification to clinical Candidate,” Annual Meeting of the American Association for Cancer Research, Apr. 6-10, 2002, 5721 (3 pages).
Towle et al., “In vitro and in vivo anticancer activities of synthetic macrocyclic ketone analogues of Halichondrin B,” Cancer Res. 61(3):1013-21 (2001).
Ueda et al., “Total synthesis of halichondrin A, the missing member in the halichondrin class of natural products,” J Am Chem Soc. 136(13):5171-6 (2014).
Uemura et al., “Norhalichondrin A: an antitumor polyether macrolide from a marine sponge,” J Am Chem Soc. 107(16):4796-8 (1985).
Vahdat et al., “Phase II study of eribulin mesylate, a Halichondrin B analog, in patients with metastatic breast cancer previously treated with an anthracycline and a taxane,” J Clin Oncol. 27(18):2954-61 (2009).
Varseev et al., “Enantioselective total synthesis of (+)- neosymbioimine,” Org Lett. 9(8):1461-4 (2007).
Wan et al., “Asymmetric Ni(II)/Cr(II)-mediated coupling reaction: Stoichiometric process,” Org Lett. 4(25):4431-4 (2002) (includes supporting information) (12 pages).
Wan et al., “Asymmetric Ni(II)/Cr(II)-mediated coupling reaction: Stoichiometric process,” Org Lett. 4(25):4431-4 (2002).
Wang et al., “Facile preparation of peracetates and per-3-bromobenzoates of alpha-mono- and disaccharides,” Molecules. 10(10):1325-34 (2005).
Wang et al., “Structure-activity relationships of halichondrin B analogues: modifications at C.30-C.38” Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 10(10):1029-32 (2000).
Wang et al., “The syntheses of pharmaceutical intermediates in supercritical fluids,” Ind Eng Chem Res. 39(12):4487-90 (2000).
Ward et al., “Catalytic enantioselective diels-alder reaction by self-assembly of the components on a Lewis acid template,” Org Lett. 7(16):3533-6 (2005) (Abstract only) (2 pages).
Xie et al., “Synthesis of the C20—C26 building block of Halichondrins via a regiospecific and stereoselective SN2′ reaction,” Org Lett. 4(25): 4427-9 (2002).
Yahata et al., “Unified Synthesis of Right Halves of Halichondrins A-C,” J Org Chem. 82(17):8792-8807 (2017).
Yamamoto et al., “Total synthesis of halichondrin C,” J Am Chem Soc. 134(2):893-6 (2012).
Yan et al., “Selective activation/coupling of polyhalogenated nucleophiles in ni/cr-mediated reactions: synthesis of c1—c19 building block of halichondrin bs,” J Am Chem Soc. 137(19):6219-25 (2015).
Yang et al., “Second generation synthesis of C27—C35 building block of E7389, a synthetic Halichondrin analogue,” Org Lett. 11(20): 4516-9 (2009).
Youssefyeh, “Acylations of ketals and enol ethers,” J Am Chem Soc. 85(23):3901-2 (1963).
Yu et al., “Atom-based enumeration: new eribulin analogues with low susceptibility to P-glycoprotein-mediated drug efflux,” Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 22(24):7363-6 (2012).
Yu et al., “From micrograms to grams: scale-up synthesis of eribulin mesylate,” Nat Prod Rep. 30(9):1158-64 (2013).
Yu et al., “Macrocyclic drugs and synthetic methodologies toward macrocycles,” Molecules 18(6):6230-68 (2013).
Yu et al., “New synthetic route to the C.14-C.21 fragment of Halichondrin B,” Book of Abstracts. 219th ACS National Meeting, San Francisco, CA, Mar. 26-30, 2000 (1 page).
Yu et al., Discovery of E7389 a fully synthetic macrocyclic ketone analog of Halichondrin B. Anticancer Agents from Natural Products. CRC Press, 241-265 (2005) (27 pages).
Zheng et al., “Macrocyclic ketone analogues of halichondrin B,” Bioorg Med Chem Lett. 14(22):5551-4 (2004).
Zheng et al., “Synthetic macrocyclic ketone analogs of halichondrin B: structure-activity relationships” Proceedings of the American Association for Cancer Research, 41:301, Abstract #1915 (2000).
Hatakeyama et al., “Preparation of racemic and chiral alkyl(1,3-butadien-2-yl)methanol derivatives utilizing 1-trimethylsilyl-2,3-butadiene as a diene source,” Tetrahedron Letters. 32(35):4509-12 (1991).
Related Publications (1)
Number Date Country
20200331928 A1 Oct 2020 US
Provisional Applications (1)
Number Date Country
62613307 Jan 2018 US